JP2019166413A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a highly interesting performance.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko game machine 1, when it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, a special symbol indicating the result of the above determination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined symbol display means, after the special symbol is variably displayed. On image display means, a performance symbol constituted by having a first partial image and a second partial image is variably displayed according to variation display of the special symbol, and the performance symbol may be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the determination according to a stop display of the special symbol. In addition, the first partial image and the second partial image may be displayed separately, and these partial images may be combined and displayed as a performance symbol.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 70

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an effect control means for controlling the execution of an effect based on the result of determination as to whether or not to execute a special game.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at the starting port, it is determined whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is executed, and a special symbol indicating the result of the above determination is displayed after variably displaying a special symbol. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the image display device provided in the gaming machine, the effect symbol is variably displayed along with the special symbol variation display, and the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed along with the special symbol stop display. Some gaming machines of this type perform a resurrection effect that displays a stop symbol in the last stage of reach production and then stops the actual design after false stop display of the effect symbol indicating the double eye. Yes (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6152190

  By the way, the effect using the effect design performed with the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily highly interesting, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly interesting performance.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, an effect symbol constituted by including the first partial image and the second partial image is variably displayed along with the variation display of the special symbol, and the determination is performed along with the stop display of the special symbol. First display control to stop and display the effect design in a manner showing the result of
The first partial image and the second partial image can be individually displayed, and the second display control can be executed in which these partial images are combined and displayed as the effect symbol.

  According to this configuration, the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed in addition to the case where the effect design configured to include the first partial image and the second partial image is variably displayed and then stopped. In some cases, these partial images are combined and displayed as an effect design. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which effect symbols are displayed based on the displayed partial image, and the first partial image and the second partial image remain synthesized. Compared to the above, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect of displaying the effect symbol.

Further, the gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention,
The production control means includes
The display of the second partial image is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the first partial image is started, and the second display control is performed in which these partial images are combined and displayed as the effect symbol. It is characterized by being possible.

  According to this configuration, the first partial image is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first partial image, the display of the second partial image is started in addition to the first partial image. The images are combined and displayed as an effect design. In this way, since the partial images constituting the effect symbol are displayed in order and the appearance of the effect symbol is displayed, from the state where the effect symbol has the first partial image and the second partial image. Compared to a conventional gaming machine that does not change, it is possible to obtain an extremely high production effect.

The gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the first invention or the second invention,
The second partial image is identification information for identifying the effect symbol from other effect symbols,
The first partial image is a decoration image that decorates the second partial image.

  According to this configuration, the identification information as the second partial image and the decoration image as the first partial image are individually displayed, and these partial images are combined and displayed as an effect design. In this way, since the identification information and the decoration image that are separately displayed as the two partial images are combined to produce the effect symbol, the effect symbol is simply variably displayed and then compared with the conventional gaming machine that stops display. Thus, it is possible to obtain an extremely high production effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect with high interest.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the classification of winning and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol per determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various settings of production. It is a screen figure which illustrates the various screens displayed on the 3rd display screen 72a. It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of the customization number notification image and customization content notification image which are displayed on the 3rd display screen 72a. It is a screen figure which illustrates the non-game reset selection screen displayed on the 1st display screen 7a. It is a time chart which illustrates the permission period of volume / light quantity adjustment, production customization, and non-game reset selection. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a waiting-for-winning command reception process executed in a sub-control board 90. 4 is a flowchart (part 1) illustrating an operation handling process executed in a sub control board 90; 6 is a flowchart (part 2) illustrating an operation handling process executed in the sub-control board 90; It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the effect performed with the change display of a 1st special symbol in a low probability low base state. It is a screen figure which illustrates the screen composition of the 1st display screen 7a in a low probability low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various production modes in a low probability low base state. It is a list which illustrates the characteristic of each normal production mode. It is a screen figure which illustrates the production in the 4th normal mode (the 1). It is the screen figure which illustrates the production in the 4th normal mode (the 2). It is the screen figure which illustrates the production in the 1st normal mode (the 1). It is the screen figure which illustrates the production in the 1st normal mode (the 2). It is a screen figure which illustrates the production in the 2nd normal mode. It is the screen figure which illustrates the production in the 3rd normal mode (the 1). It is a screen figure (the 2) which illustrates the production in the 3rd normal mode. It is a screen figure which illustrates the production in the 3rd normal mode (the 3).

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game that can give a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. And simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The plurality of effect buttons can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, the player directly touches the button portion to input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. Or non-contact type input detection means (such as a photoelectric type) that detects and inputs that a part of the player's body is close Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and image display devices (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72). Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are located in front of the front frame 51 (player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed in a slanted shape in the outward direction so as to protrude toward the outside. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are similar to the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game production (characters, production designs, etc.), demonstration production, information related to the game (acquired game information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production), Information related to the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information and may display the same information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There is a case to do. Further, the same information is displayed on any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one is different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as “image display device”.

  The image display device 7 is provided in an inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in an outer region of the game area 3. ing. As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It has been. For this reason, the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 can be pivoted in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured to be able to turn a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 This is a configuration for preventing damage to the hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-station equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of FIG. 1) of the gaming machine 1. . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbols”) are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, also referred to as an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as “effect symbol display section”). ), And the design symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the gaming state according to the gaming state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main player of the game. The effect symbol 8L is also referred to as “left symbol”, the effect symbol 8C is also referred to as “middle symbol”, and the effect symbol 8R is also referred to as “right symbol”.

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in a normal state (a low-probability low-base state described later, state A). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first game state). At the same time, the special symbol success / failure determination probability (first special symbol success / failure determination and second special symbol success / failure determination) has a low probability (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the second special symbol variation time is the first special symbol. Is set longer (twice or more) than the fluctuation time (all deviations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in a normal state, the second special symbol is variably displayed by firing a game ball in the right game area 3B (second game area) and entering the start hole (second start port 21 or third start port 26). It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the first special symbol is variably displayed by firing a game ball in the left game area 3A (first game area) and entering the first start port 20 Has been. In other words, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is variably displayed mainly by the first special symbol (effect symbol). For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a ("first") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the “special symbol display unit”) and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”). The result of symbol change display (result of special symbol success / failure determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol success / failure determination is also simply referred to as “win / failure determination” or “first success / failure determination”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol success / failure determination is also referred to as “a / failure determination execution unit” or “first determination / failure determination execution unit”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the production symbol is stopped with the same three-digit symbol (Zoro eyes) such as “777” (also called “big hit symbol”). indicate. In addition, when it is a small hit (second specific hit), it is produced with a preset chance symbol such as “135” or a small bonus exclusive symbol such as “3 * 3” (also referred to as “small hit symbol”). Stop displaying symbols. In addition, when a small hit is made, the symbols in the same mode may be stopped and displayed for the small hits symbol and the off symbol instead of the mode for displaying the small hits dedicated symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  Also, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is unacceptable, at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” is stopped and displayed with a different symbol design (“out symbol” ”). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by viewing the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as an execution mode of the effect symbol variation display, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed in the up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, a mode in which the effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and the first effect symbol display unit. In addition to 7b, there is a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display part 71a and the third effect symbol display part 72a. Moreover, in addition to this, you may have the aspect which produces an effect display only using the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect pattern game effect) using the effect symbols as described above, the game is executed in accordance with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a demonstration for waiting for a customer, and the like are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. Although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b differs depending on whether or not a game is being performed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously). Such a type of game The machine is also called “simultaneous variable machine”.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a according to the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) for displaying the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure hold to be described later. The first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area. And the stored number of second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. Note that the display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect or the like). Further, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit is displayed (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the special symbol (effect symbol) that is the main depending on the gaming state). It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decoration body 10 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet. The warp flowing down the game area 3 is received from the warp inlet, and the game ball is discharged from the warp outlet and guided to the stage unit 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the gaming state, and a decoration member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is arranged Yes.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable in accordance with a game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. For example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of winning). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. As a result, the player enhances the gaming interest and increases the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined ( The first special symbol determination / first determination is performed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the determination result after a predetermined time.

  Above the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a normal start opening, a passing opening, an entrance, a specific start, etc.) through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (Also called mouth). A game ball entering from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down in the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28 a, a normal symbol success / failure random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, The symbol symbol determination (also referred to as “normal symbol determination” or “third symbol determination”) is performed, and the normal symbol starts to be changed. After a predetermined time, the normal symbol is determined based on the result of the normal symbol determination. Stop display. When the winning ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, a control unit (main control unit 80) that performs normal symbol determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 is referred to as “correction determination execution unit” or “ It is also referred to as “third correctness determination execution means”. The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. In other words, the sensors that detect the entry into the gate are the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed, the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied ("big hit" Only “executable state” and “hit waiting state”). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (waiting state for big hit) is not satisfied, the control process for the normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the waiting big hit game is started and a predetermined big prize opening ( A round game in which the first grand prize opening 30) is in an open state (a state in which a player can enter a ball) is started.

  The game area 3 is a right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 and a game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29) is provided with a first big prize opening 30. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as “first variable entrance”) is provided. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32 and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the top surface. When the opening / closing member 32 is closed, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the top surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first big prize opening 30. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 to thereby form an upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 enters the first big prize opening 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are smoothly drawn into the first large opening / closing member. While entering the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the first grand prize opening 30 can enter a game ball only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first grand prize winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 32 so that the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center ornament 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 does not change the ease of entering a game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third start port 26 is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the third start port 26, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined ( The second special symbol determination and second determination determination) are executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the determination result after a predetermined time. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first grand prize winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), the upper game ball passage where the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower-stage game ball passage in which two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26, for example. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third start opening 26 is a fixed winning device (entrance entrance) that can always enter the ball, it becomes a big hit in the left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When the game is executed in a game, it is possible to place the game ball in the third start opening 26 during the big hit game (hold) and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the big hit game ends.

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, a variable in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as “variable starter” or “variable starter”) having a second starter 21 of the type is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined (first 1 special symbol success / failure determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination of success / failure after a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Yes. The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  Similarly to the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 is a gaming ball passage whose upper surface is substantially rectangular (long plate shape). In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the inlet of the second starting port 21 and A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side in the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second start port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second start port 21 enters the second start port 21. Thus, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened) The ball smoothly enters the second starting port 21 and flows down in the closed state (when closed) to allow the game ball to flow in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning port 35 to be described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. To guide.

  Thus, in a state where a game ball is launched into the right region (right game region 3B) and a game is played, when the game ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variably displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Therefore, in a state where a game ball is fired in the right region (right game region 3B) and a game is played (right-handed game), a game state (state B: low probability) in which the game is mainly performed with the variable display of the first special symbol. A base state, a high-accuracy high-base state) and a game state (state C: high-accuracy low-base state) in which a game is played mainly based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the game area 3, which is the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, the game area below (downstream) the second start port 21 is provided with a second big prize opening 35. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as “second variable entrance”) is provided. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens / closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on its upper surface. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 37 closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 and opens / closes the opening / closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second big prize opening 35. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The open / close member 37 that has been removed disappears from the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 enters the second big prize opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second grand prize winning opening 35, and in the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big prize winning device 36 (second variable entrance) is configured to open and close the open / close member 37 so that the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  Further, in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) of general entrances 27 are provided. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as left strike, and the strike method in which the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B so as to flow down is referred to as right strike. . In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed. In other words, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol success / failure determination).

  On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the win determination (first special symbol win determination) based on entering the first starting port 20, the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) are finished (low high accuracy base state, high accuracy) In the high base state or the high accuracy low base state), entering the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35 by right-handed. A game aimed at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in the left-handed game, first, a big-hit standby state is entered, and a right-handed game aiming at entering the gate 28 is obtained. Next, when the player enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit waiting state, the big hit game starts, and the right hit game is aimed mainly at the first big winning opening 30.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state after the big hit game is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state (state B), mainly to the gate 28 (normal gate) and the second start port 21. It is a right-handed game that aims to enter. On the other hand, when the big hit game is finished and the gaming state after the big hit game is in the high probability low base state (state C), the right-handed game aiming to enter the third starting opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. In other words, the low-accuracy base state and the high-accuracy base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly consisting of entering the second starting port 21 by right-handed (first special symbol success / failure determination). The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game whose main subject is a ball entering the third starting port 26 (second special symbol determination). Thereby, even if it is the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of special symbol success / failure determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

  In the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and the game balls flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 in the right game area 3B The amount is adjustable (can be reduced). That is, the second out port 34b is installed upstream of all the entrances installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b are used to It is possible to adjust the rate of entry (ingress rate) of game balls into the installation area. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), the third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second big winning port 35 which is a big winning port for small hits. Is provided. By this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of game balls into the game area on the side of the second big winning port 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entering the second big winning port 35 during the small hit game. Adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c can adjust the rate of entry of the game ball (entry rate) into the second big prize port 35.

  When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, the second major winning port 35, and the general winning port 27, the respective starting ports A predetermined number of game balls (also called “prize balls” or “game profit”) are paid out (given). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out (the amount of game profit) based on the entrance to the first big prize opening 30 is the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second big prize opening 35. Set more than the number (amount of gaming profit). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one entry, and the second big prize opening 35 has 10 pieces for one entry. The prize ball is to be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and stopped. 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) that displays the normal symbol (also referred to as “specific identification information”) in a variable manner and stops display. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored decision determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information (second display) related to the second special symbol. 2nd special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of stored operation (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. ing.

  Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination has been won, the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination. When the result is a win, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, the right A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be hit or left. The main indicator 40 includes a variation state indicator 49 that indicates the variation state (c1) of the first special symbol, the variation state (c2) of the second special symbol, and the variation state (c3) of the normal symbol. Yes. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main controller described later.

  The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the third start port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed. The special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped (derived) is used to display the first start port 20 and the second start port. 21 or the result of the determination on the basis of the ball entering the third starting port 26 (special symbol determination on determination, jackpot lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the release pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped is displayed. A special game (a big hit game, a small hit game) for opening the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the special prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and / or the second big prize opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is 4R first big hit, the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs “jnkl” are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, in the case of detachment, the two “lo” LEDs can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. About the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, in a predetermined order from left to right. It can be set as the aspect which each LED lights so that light may flow repeatedly.

  Thus, each of the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b is composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and the first special symbol display 41a is displayed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When a plurality of LEDs corresponding to 1 are turned on (flashing) in a predetermined order and the variation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is determined as a jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), A small hit type (one mode if one type) and a stop type (one mode if one type) are stopped and displayed.

  The variation state indicator 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3). The display unit c1 indicates the variation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit The variation state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the variation state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display part c1 which shows the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display part) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display part, indicator) than the first special symbol indicator 41a. Has been. Then, the first special symbol is displayed in a blinking manner during the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the display is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the first special symbol determination. Specifically, in the case of losing, the stop display is made by turning off the light, and in the case of big hit, the stop display is made by lighting all red regardless of the type of the big hit. When the change display of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display section c1 is blinked during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is lit yellow when the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit red when the big hit symbol is stopped, and the off symbol is stopped. Is turned off (not displayed). As a result, by viewing the display unit c1 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the first special symbol (during variation, interruption, stop, determination result). Moreover, since the fluctuation state display device 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of display devices is smaller) than the first special symbol display device 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type and the like in detail. Can be easily grasped. Moreover, the fluctuation state display device 49 (display unit c1) functions as the second first special symbol display device 41a. “Interruption of fluctuation display” is a process that can be performed when the result of the determination of whether or not the other special symbol (second special symbol) to be executed at the same time is a big hit. Then, after the release condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

  Moreover, the display part c2 which shows the fluctuation | variation state of a 2nd special symbol is one LED (display part, indicator) which is fewer LED than the 2nd special symbol display 41b similarly to the display part c1. Display section). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, it blinks, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. Specifically, when it is off, it is stopped and displayed by turning off the light. When it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed with all red lights regardless of the big hit type. When it is a small hit, all lights are green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Press to stop display. When the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display part c2 is blinked during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is lit yellow when the variation display is interrupted, is lit red when the big hit symbol is stopped, and the small hit symbol is stopped. The inside is displayed in green, and is off (not displayed) while the off symbol is stopped. As a result, by viewing the display part c2 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the second special symbol (during variation, interruption, stop, determination result). Moreover, since the fluctuation state display device 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of display devices is smaller) than the second special symbol display device 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type and the like in detail. Can be easily grasped. Moreover, the fluctuation state display device 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display device 41b.

  In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as “first state symbol” or “first sub-symbol”. Further, since the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as “first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as“ confirmation symbol ”)”. The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as “second state symbol” or “second sub-symbol”. Moreover, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as “second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as“ confirmation symbol ”)”. In addition, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and stop display of the second special symbol. Display fluctuation and stop. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination of the first special symbol is out, the first state symbol is stopped and displayed by turning off (disappearing mode), and in the case of a big hit, all red lights (regardless of the big hit type) Press to stop display. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is the same.

  Moreover, the display part c3 which shows the fluctuation state of a normal symbol is 1 LED (display part) which is fewer LEDs (display part, indicator) than the normal symbol display 42 similarly to the display part c1. It is configured. During normal symbol variation display, it blinks, and when the regular symbol variation time has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination. Specifically, in the case of losing, the stop display is performed by turning off the light, and in the case of winning, the stop display is performed by lighting in red regardless of the type of the contact. In addition, when the change display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display unit c3 is blinked during normal symbol variation display, is lit yellow when the variation display is interrupted, is lit red when the symbol symbol is stopped, and is extinguished when the off symbol symbol is stopped. (Hidden). Thus, by viewing the display part c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49, it becomes possible to grasp the fluctuation state of the normal symbol (fluctuating, interrupting, stopping, whether or not it is determined whether or not it is correct). In addition, since the fluctuation state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators) is smaller than that of the normal symbol indicator 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type and the like in detail, but the fluctuation state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

  In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display part c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as “first state normal symbol” or “first sub-normal symbol”. In addition, the first state normal symbol is subjected to variable display and stop display corresponding to the normal symbol variable display and stop display. Accordingly, when the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is determined to be off, the display is stopped with a light extinction (disappearance mode).

  In this embodiment, a special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and a fluctuation state indicator 49 are provided, and the fluctuation state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. When any LED of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs that can grasp the fluctuation state in detail fails (breakage, disconnection, etc.) However, it is possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state by the fluctuation state indicator 49. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the fluctuation state display 49. In this embodiment, the main control unit controls display of both the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b) and the fluctuation state display 49.

  Here, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the stop display modes (display result of the variable display) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is referred to as a “hit mode”. ”,“ Specific mode ”,“ specific display mode ”or“ specific display result ”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is“ out of mode ”or“ non-specific mode ” , Also referred to as “non-specific display mode” or “non-specific display result”. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit is also referred to as “big hit mode”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit is “small”. It is also referred to as a “winning mode”. Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various kinds of random numbers for determining whether or not a special symbol is appropriate based on the received ball Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the first special figure storage is stored as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as “first acquisition information”). If the information is stored in the part 85a and acquired based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, the information is stored in the second special figure reservation storage part 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as “second acquisition information”). Is done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when it is possible to display a special symbol based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special symbol hold means that the special symbol determination random number or the like corresponding to the special symbol hold is determined, and the special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the change display of the special symbol based on the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entrance That is, during the execution of variable display of each special symbol, or during the execution of a special game based on any special symbol success / failure determination, the special symbol success / failure determination with respect to the entry is made up to a predetermined number (four each). Can be reserved (held).

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two “uv” LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit) is set so that both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”, can be used. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. In addition, when the number of holds is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u ● v ●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲” to make a display mode. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) that opens the second start port 21 in an open pattern according to the current gaming state. Also called). Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). Further, when the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol in a form in which only the LED of t is lit, such as “s □ t ■”, is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When there is a game ball passing to the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol determination based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map hold in a general map hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the pending map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal symbol variation display based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, during the normal symbol variation display or during the execution of the auxiliary game Can reserve (hold) the right to determine whether or not to accept a normal symbol for the passage of a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. Specifically, the universal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of “qr”, and displays the number of universal map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of general map holds. For example, when the number of hold is 0, “q □ r □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode can be adopted in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of holds 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 ("main control unit" and "main control unit") that performs control related to gaming profits such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. (Also referred to as “game control unit”), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit”, “sub-control unit”, or “effect control unit”) for performing control related to effects executed as the game progresses, game balls A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) for performing control related to payout, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect indicator 102, a third effect hold indicator 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) that performs display control of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing a main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case storing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case storing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. Is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit 85 (the first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b) and the general figure storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a third start port sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first big prize port sensor 30a, and a second. A big winning opening sensor 35a and a general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detecting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26 a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second big prize opening sensor 35a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, a second start opening solenoid 24, a first big prize winning solenoid 33, and a second big prize winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, A figure hold display 44, a change state display 49, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 for paying out a prize ball or a rental ball and a card unit 135, and the launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of FIG. 1), and the inserted prepaid card (game) when the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation. It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drives to pay out prize balls and pays out balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 is Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is connected to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. Display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b. Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, holding symbols, etc.) Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The production indicator 102 is made up of two LEDs, one of which displays the change display and the stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the change display of the second special symbol. In addition, the display mode shows the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by lighting / extinguishing the corresponding LED or the color according to the stop display. Press to stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on and off the two LEDs, or a combination of colors, the third effect on-hold display 103a is displayed on the hold number displayed on the first effect on-hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. Display control is performed in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. The fourth effect hold indicator 103b is display-controlled in a display mode that indicates the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect design display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect design display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect design display). A part or almost all of the part) may be in a state where a part or all of the effect design 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d cannot be visually recognized. is there. Even in such a covering state, these effect indicators 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on are supplementarily so that it is possible to reliably confirm the change display and stop display of the effect symbols, the number of holds, etc. And the 4th production reservation display 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display forms of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state that can be always viewed without being obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. In addition, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Note that the movable decorative member 14 is only partially visible in FIG. 1, but is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  Further, the sub control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, a description will be given of the control related to the special symbol success / failure determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, it has “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”. In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When “small hit” is selected, the “small hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. In addition, in the case of “out”, the “out of symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined that the game is a big win or a small win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called a “big hit game”, and a special game executed as a small hit is called a “small hit game”.

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol success / failure determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol success / failure determination result is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profits that can be acquired by the special game differs, or the game state after the special game ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “15R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “15R first big hit” “5 big hits”, “2R 6 big hits”, and “2R 7 big hits”. In “15R first big hit” and “15R fifth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is 15. In addition, in “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is four. In “2R sixth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is two. Thus, in the big hit, all the first big prize opening 30 is opened, and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. Accordingly, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as “big winning big winning opening (big winning variable winning opening)”.

  In addition, “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “15R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” Then, the state is shifted to a high probability state described later (actual change function is activated). Therefore, these five types of big hits are also called “probable big hits (high probability big hits)”. This high probability state (probability changing function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, “4R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” shift the gaming state after the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of big hits are also referred to as “low probability big hits (low probability big hits, normal big hits)”.

  Also, “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit” and “15R fifth big hit” are “second special symbol short time” which sets the variation time of the second special symbol to a short time after the big hit game ends. "Function" is activated and the high base generation function is not activated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than the low accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, and high accuracy high base state. It is set. In particular, the variation time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, the playability of the high probability low base state (state C) will be described later. A ball is entered into the mouth 26. Then, it is a period during which it is possible to increase the number of game balls during the period between the previous jackpot and the next jackpot (between the jackpots) by performing the second special symbol win / fail determination. In addition, by frequently hitting the small hits in the high probability low base state between the big hits, it can be expected that a lot of game balls will be acquired in a short time by the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, “4R 4th big hit” and “2R 7th big hit” activate the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time shortening function, the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol time function is shorter than when the first special symbol time shortening function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low-accuracy base state. In the case of “4R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, the low-accuracy base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol variation display is terminated 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy base state, the right-hand game is performed in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above. This is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  In addition, “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” activate the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Since the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” continue until the next big hit occurs. Further, as described above, the “probability changing function” continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, after the big hit game is finished, the high-accuracy base state (the first special symbol short-time state) is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In the high-accuracy base state, as in the low-accuracy base state, by making a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol success / failure determination is performed, and the game is anticipated for the next big hit. As described above, the high probability low base state is a period of time for performing a second special symbol success / failure determination by right-handed game, and frequently playing small hits, so that many game balls can be played in a short time by small hits. This is an advantageous period for players who can expect to win. Note that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and low base state than game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and high base state.

  In addition, a highly accurate base state after the big hit game (4R third big hit game) related to “4R third big hit game” and a low rate after the big hit game (4R fourth big hit game) related to “4R fourth big hit game” are reached. By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certain base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to the non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognized is difficult).

  When the type of jackpot was “4R 3rd jackpot”, the high-accuracy and high-base state continued even after the special symbol fluctuation display was passed 100 times, resulting in “4R 4th jackpot”. In this case, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays a game with the expectation that the highly accurate and high base state will continue even after 100 times have elapsed, and enhances the gaming interest. In the low-accuracy base state or the high-accuracy base state, that is, the high base state, the player does not reduce the number of possessed balls very much (in a state where the decrease rate of the possessed balls is slower than the low-accuracy low base state). It can be performed.

  Similarly, after the end of the jackpot game (2R sixth jackpot game) related to “2R sixth jackpot game” and after the jackpot game (2R seventh jackpot game) related to “2R seventh jackpot game” ends. It is difficult to recognize which game state the player has by executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) To do. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to the non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognized is difficult).

  When the type of jackpot was “2R sixth jackpot”, the high-accuracy base state continued even after the special symbol fluctuation display was passed 100 times, and it was “2R seventh jackpot”. In this case, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays a game with the expectation that the highly accurate and high base state will continue even after 100 times have elapsed, and enhances the gaming interest.

  In addition, as for the small hits that may occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is six times, and once (and The total (open) time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds is released with 6 times of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small hit game is set in comparison with the big hit game (for example, 15R first big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.). However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (a large number of times) in a highly accurate and low base state between the big hits, a plurality of small hit games can be executed and more game balls can be acquired. Further, in the small hit, all the second big prize opening 35 is opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second big winning opening 35 is also referred to as “small winning big winning opening (variable winning opening for small winning)”. Note that, in the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times of opening the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds but simply called the number of times of opening. Also, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the gaming state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it will be in a high probability state after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs If the game state is a low probability state, the low probability state is set even after the small hit game is over. Similarly, the time reduction function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In addition, the probability of allocating to each big hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) judgment is 20% for 15R first big hit, 10% for 4R second big hit, 35% for 4R third big hit, and 4R first big hit. The 4 big hits are 35%. On the other hand, the big hit in the determination of success / failure of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 50% for 15R fifth big hit, 15% for 2R sixth big hit, and 35% for 2R seventh big hit. In other words, if the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol success / failure judgment) based on the ball entering the third start port 26 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function described later, It becomes a big hit (15R fifth big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than being a big hit in a win / fail determination (first special symbol win / fail determination) performed by entering a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. It is more likely for the player to win a large number of hits (second special symbol win / no-go determination) when a game ball enters the 3 start opening 26 is more advantageous. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of a high-accuracy and low-base state in which a game ball can be increased by a small hit along with the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or missed is determined based on a “special symbol success / failure determination random number (also referred to as“ correction determination information ”)”. The determination of the type of jackpot is based on “a random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as“ design determining random number ”or“ symbol determining information ”). The result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol success / failure random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the balls entering the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 include special design success / failure determination random numbers and jackpot type determination random numbers. In addition, there is “variation pattern random number (also referred to as“ variation pattern information ”)”. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers shown in FIG. The normal symbol success / failure determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol success / failure determination). Normal design random numbers take values in the range of 0-240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the second start port 21 are in an activated state or not. There are a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of the operating states. A state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and a state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the low probability state (hit probability: 1/315). In other words, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table is used using the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state. A determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display result is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (big hit probability) is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  In addition, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time-short state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time-short state”. In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the short-time state, the digestion of the special figure hold is accelerated, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as “second special symbol time shortening function” as shown in FIG. Yes. State A (low probability low base state) and state B (low probability high base state) shown in FIG. 9 are the states in which the second special symbol short-time function is not activated, that is, the state mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and enters a game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the second special symbol is determined. Is displayed fluctuating. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds, small hit 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such state) (Also referred to as “first condition state”). In addition, since it is a low base state (1st game state), the entrance into the 2nd starting port 21 is an impossible or difficult state.

  Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first start port 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display simultaneously (in parallel). Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable special symbol display to end. The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

  On the other hand, in state B (low-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy high-base state), a right-handed game is performed because the high-base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time reduction function are operating. Thus, it is possible to enter both the second start port 21 and the third start port 26 that have been opened. In the state B, like the state A, the second special symbol time reduction function is not activated. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, the variation time of the second special symbol is very long. Since it is set to (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds, small hit 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol determination is executed and the first special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, the first special symbol time reduction function is set by the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, and the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed more frequently than in the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

  Further, as a state mainly based on the second special symbol success / failure determination, state C (highly accurate low base state) shown in FIG. 9 is provided. In state C (highly accurate low base state), the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, so it is possible to play a game aiming to enter the third starting port 26 by playing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third start port 26, the second special symbol determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Also, the second special symbol short-time state is set by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function, and the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed more frequently than in the state A and the state B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can do. Thereby, it is possible to execute the second special symbol success / failure determination which is more advantageous than the first special symbol success / failure determination.

  In the state C, when the ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the first special symbol determination is performed and the first special symbol is variably displayed. Since the variation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even when the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 has entered the ball or when there is a holding memory related to the first special symbol success / failure determination, the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol success / failure determination is executed as much as possible.

  In this way, both state B and state C are states in which a right-handed game is performed, but in state B, as in state C, the gaming state is performed mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination, and state C Then, it is set as the game state which makes a 2nd special symbol success / failure determination as a subject. As a result, in the so-called consecutive game period (right-handed state) after a shift to right-handed game in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, the first special symbol propriety determination The game state is diversified by transitioning between a game state in which the subject is the main and the game state in which the second special symbol determination is main. In addition, the game state in which the first special symbol success / failure determination is the main and the game state in which the second special symbol success / failure determination is the main have different types of possible big hits (big hit games). While the game continues, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming bored and enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, when the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (this state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. Since the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, the player can play the game smoothly without reducing the number of balls compared to the left-handed game. 2 special symbol variable games) can be executed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time-shortening function is not activated during the period in which the second special symbol time-shortening function is operating (the variation time of the first special symbol time-saving function is longer than the normal state). However, the first special symbol time reduction function may be activated. Further, it is assumed that the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased in the state B and increases in the state C.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (first special symbol time shortening function or second special symbol time shortening function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of normal symbols operate in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy Does not operate in the low base state. Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the low base state (also referred to as a “normal high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (per hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger for the state B than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). The normal symbol hit / fail determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the normal symbol becomes a hit (the stop symbol becomes a normal symbol) becomes higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination becomes a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to release The second start port is in an open state during the period of operation. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol win / reject determination becomes a win in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening and closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the opening operation number may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times for 2.0 seconds. Alternatively, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened six times in 1.0 second, and may be more than the number of opening times in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of opening times of the variable winning device 22 operates.

  In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated in the high base state, compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. The period during which the second start port 21 is open becomes longer (the open time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol success / failure determination increases. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls.

  In addition, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second start port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol variation time starts when the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used as a game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

  Thereby, the game ball flow speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side. In addition, as an aspect for reducing the flow-down speed, in addition, an inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibiting member (protrusion or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. In addition, thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 in the high base state does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the second big prize opening 35 is opened (a state in which a ball can be entered) due to a small hit, the game ball that has flowed down enters the second start port 21 and the second It is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35. Further, the third out port 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the second large winning port 35 from entering the second large winning port 35.

  In the high base state, not all the functions described above may operate. That is, the second start port is activated by the operation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 than when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether or not the second special symbol is successful than to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct, the player uses the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol may be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the variation time (average variation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state (even if the ball enters the third starting port 26), it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the gaming efficiency is very high. It is bad. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol variably by left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by right-handed game. Here, “the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the first special symbol is “0”. ". In addition, “the state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the second special symbol is “0”. It means that.

  Further, in the high base state such as the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, the frequency at which the second start port 21 is opened is improved, and the first special symbol time-shortening function is used to change the first special symbol variation time. This shortens the game time and improves the game efficiency of right-handed games. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously if the right-handed game is performed and the first special symbol determination is made, rather than the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is easily opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right-hand strike is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate.

  Further, in the highly accurate low base state, the second special symbol time-shortening function shortens the second special symbol variation time, and the game efficiency by right-handed gaming is improved. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol determination that is advantageous to the player. Further, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is the same as in the low accuracy low base state (normal state), and is executed based on the entrance to the second start port 21. The variation time of the first special symbol is changed over a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). In addition, in the highly accurate and low base state, since the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extending function of the variable winning device 22 are not activated, the entry to the second start port 21 is not performed. The sphere frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as the high base state. However, instead of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the small hits with a high probability (small hit probability: 420/630) prevent the game balls from being reduced during the big hits, but rather make frequent hits. It is also possible to increase the holding ball by (multiple occurrences).

  In other words, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), by entering the second start port 21 frequently by right-handed games, the ball enters the second start port 21 The winning of the next big hit is aimed at by the first special symbol success / failure determination without greatly reducing the holding ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entrance to the second start opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second start opening 21, The sphere does not increase (is maintained). Further, in this embodiment, since it is set so that about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls enter the second start opening 21, the high base is set unless another entrance is entered. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the specification is such that the ball is reduced slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the entrance rate of the game balls into the second start port 21.

  On the other hand, in the high probability low base state, the right hit game causes a small hit to occur at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol success / failure determination based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, and the high probability. While trying to increase the number of balls in the small hit game during the low base state, the second special symbol success / failure determination, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol success / failure determination, aims to generate the next big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, in the highly accurate and low base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period of the high probability and low base state continues), the more small hits occur. There will be more opportunities (to play a small hit game), which will be advantageous to the player.

[Description of board configuration and game state]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), there are various entrances from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first grand prize opening 30, and the second game area. 2. The starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when these winning holes are closed, about 90% of the game balls launched into the right game area 3B are about 90%. , Passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows into the second second winning opening 35. The upper and lower opening / closing members 37 are made to flow down to the out port 34. And if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, it enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entered gaming ball is placed in the gaming area downstream from it. It has a composition that does not exist. Further, the remaining 10% not flowing into the gate 28 enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged out of the gaming machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

  By arranging the gate 28 in the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is prevented from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. Further, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes “0” and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream in the right game area, almost all game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether other winning holes are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the entry to other winning holes.

  When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low-accuracy base state, high-accuracy base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second start port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability per normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) that is almost a hit, so the game ball is gated Immediately after passing through (after 1 second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second start port 21. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol success / failure determination is executed and the normal symbol is variably displayed, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21 before the game ball reaches the entrance. 2 The start port 21 is opened. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once for 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds (1 second closing → 6 .. Opening for 0 seconds-> Closing for 1 second-> Opening for about 6.0 seconds->)).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second start port 21 is almost open, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second start port 21. You will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed. In the first special symbol success / failure determination, in the highly accurate base state, a big hit is made with a probability of 1/63, a small hit is not generated, and it is missed with a probability of 62/63.

  First, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is unsuccessful, most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28 and are in the open state. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching before the second start port 21 and flow down to the second start port 21 without flowing down to the third start port 21. 26 enters the ball or flows into the outlet 34. Thereby, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed continuously (at a high frequency). In addition, since one winning ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease rate of the holding ball is reduced and the first special symbol determination is executed, and the next big hit is made. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one winning ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a manner corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. . Further, the second big prize winning port 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game can smoothly enter the first big winning opening without being blocked by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second start port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the game shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in the present embodiment, the second start port 21 is in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the game can be opened, a game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game has entered the second start port 21 first, and has not entered the second start port 21. Only the player enters the second grand prize opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one winning ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is simply prolonged, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, and does not proceed smoothly, and there is a risk that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. Become. It should be noted that since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may also prevent the entry to the second start opening 21 when not in the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The highly accurate low base state is a low base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to advance the game by right-handed. When a right-handed game is performed in the highly accurate low base state, first, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol determination). In the low base state (highly accurate low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal symbol is also low compared to the high base state Since (1/240) is set, after the game ball has passed through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second start port 21 is opened. It becomes a state. Since the probability of winning is set to 1/240, it is almost out of place, and the possibility that the second start port 21 is in the open state is low. In addition, instead of such a mode, the probability of winning in the normal symbol success / failure determination in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all may be outliers. In this way, the second start port 21 is not opened in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

  That is, in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability that the second start port 21 is in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the second start port 21 entrance becomes the second start port 21. The possibility of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a small hit is different in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination has no small hit, and the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit.

  The game ball that flows down the first big prize opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is branched into the third starting port 26 side passage and the second starting port 21 side passage by the branching portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the third start port 26 side passage enters the third start port 26, the second special symbol determination is performed. In addition, in the highly accurate low base state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, it is unlikely that the second start port 21 will be in the open state. All flows down to the second big winning port 35 and the third out port 34c provided downstream of the second starting port 21 without entering the second starting port 21.

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is 6 is opened in the opening / closing mode for small hits shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the second starting port 21 side passage passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state and flows down to the second big winning port 35 and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big prize opening 35.

  The prize balls based on the entrance to the second grand prize opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore enter the second big prize opening 35 during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to increase the holding ball during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, since the high-accuracy low base state continues at least until the next big hit is generated by the special symbol success / failure determination, the player may increase the ball as the high-accuracy low base state continues for a long period of time. It becomes possible. In the high-accuracy and high-base state, the second special symbol short-time state and the first special symbol variation time are set to a long time (first special symbol long-time state). Is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol success / failure determination. In the present embodiment, on average, about 20 prize balls (two entered balls) can be obtained by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (multiple times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in ten times). Also, as a total winning ball of the “renso” period in which the right-handed game is continued, in addition to the winning ball of the big hit game, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added, and a larger amount of gaming balls can be acquired. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream of the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for big hit (dedicated to big hit) and the second starting port 21 (the most downstream of these) is for small hit ( It is considered as a big prize opening. In addition, the second large winning opening 35, which is a small winning large winning opening, is arranged downstream of the second starting opening 21, so that the opening of the second starting opening 21 (opening / closing control) causes a second large winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second start port 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol determination), the high base state ( The possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is higher in the high-accuracy and low-base state than in the low-accuracy and high-base state). Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second large winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering the ball), 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the start port 21 is made more effective.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the second start port 21 is configured to be hardly opened in the low-accuracy base state where a small hit game can occur (it may be configured not to be opened at all), the small hit It is difficult to adjust the rate of entering the second big winning opening 35 when a game is generated by entering the second starting port 21. In view of this, by providing a third out port 34c between the second starting port 21 and the second large winning port 35, and making it possible to adjust the rate of entering the third out port 34c, the second large winning a prize is obtained. The entrance rate to the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

  In addition, even if it is the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the ball is almost maintained (including slight increase or decrease) (or the rate of decrease of the ball is suppressed). However, a state where a game is played in the expectation that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (a high base state), and a game ball is inserted into the third starting port 26 to make a small A game state (high probability low) with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while entering the second big prize opening 35 at the time of winning and increasing the holding ball Base state), and diversify gameplay. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest. It should be noted that for the player, the gaming state is more advantageous in the high-accuracy and low-base state in which the holding ball can be increased than in the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low-accuracy high-base state or high-accuracy high-base state) and a high-accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the entertainment amusement.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is also used as the gate 28, and is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B. As a result, when the big hit waiting state is established, the second starting port 21 or the like does not block the passage to the start gate 29, and allows the game ball to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing to start the big hit game. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is necessary to provide upstream from the 2 start port 21, the 3rd start port 26, and the second big prize opening 35.

  In addition, when a right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner to notify that the game should be fired to the right game area. Further, when the left game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 includes two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, production symbol) is performed is “low probability low base state”, “high probability low base state”, “ It is possible to control either “low accuracy high base state” or “high accuracy high base state”. Of these, the low accuracy low base state is also referred to as “normal gaming state”, and the high accuracy low base state is It is also called “specific game state”.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter Perform a reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “special 1” or “first special”, and the second special symbol is “special”. 2 ”and“ second special drawing ”.

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is finished and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), an output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. The command and the like output here include information regarding the gaming state, special symbol success / failure determination, symbol as a jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a third start port sensor 26a) that are mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The detection signals detected by the first grand prize opening sensor 30a, the second big prize opening sensor 35a, the general ball opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored as prize ball information in the output buffer of the RAM. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including normal symbol random number counter values) shown in FIG. 7 includes the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started). Thereby, randomness is given to the acquired values of various random numbers.

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), the start ball entry process (S205), the ordinary figure operation process (S206), and the special figure 1 operation process (S207) described later. ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210). Thereafter, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is terminated. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of normal symbol holding balls, more specifically, the counter for counting the number of holding the general symbol holding in the RAM) It is determined whether or not (value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the stored number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label -TRND-H, Fig. 7 (B)) of the random symbol counter for determining whether or not the symbol is normal is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. Then, the obtained random number value (acquired information, universal figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Determine (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 hold balls (the number of first special figure hold, specifically, In step S306, it is determined whether the value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of stored special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random numbers are acquired. Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the jackpot type determination random number The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the random number value shown in FIG. 7A), and these acquired random values (acquisition information, special information) The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls in the first special figure storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the third start port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 holding balls (the number of second special figure holdings, specifically the main control) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of stored special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and special figure 2 relations A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value) and the obtained random number value are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in the second figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at start-up]
Next, the start ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start-and-coming process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting and entering ball process (S205), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (S315). If it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the random number counter for special symbol success / failure determination (the random number for special symbol success / failure determination) among the acquired random number values read out is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) If the result of the determination is a jackpot, the jackpot type is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (so-called “hold prefetching”) in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination of whether or not the big hit is made) is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the processing shown in FIG. ]).

  It should be noted that the prior determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a variation pattern information determination table. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination and the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether it is a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high big hit reliability, or the like.

  Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot information), Information indicating the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (random number for jackpot type determination) (hit type information), information indicating whether the special symbol success / failure determination random number value matches the jackpot determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random number value) and the like are generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 may be transmitted to the sub control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value may be transmitted. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information, etc.) may be transmitted.

  In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether the information is related to the big hit, which is the type of the big hit, The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command, whether or not the special figure 2 acquisition random number acquired becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged in the probability state. Thereby, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entering command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  For the purpose of preventing fraud, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is determined is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the acquired random number values read out in S316, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit value) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value) and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) and information indicating the result of the prior determination is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” as in the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S319). If it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is terminated as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with reference to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S321), Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special FIG. 1 start entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the prior determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the determination of the success / failure in the special figure 1 success / failure determination process described later.

[Usuzu movement process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a normal operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start and entry process (S205). In the normal drawing operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401) NO at S403, YES at S403), normal symbol variation processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (NO at S401 and S403, YES at S405), the normal symbol is fixed Processing (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501). Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol success / failure determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select the symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern with the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process (to be described later) is performed (S504), then a normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
Next, the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol success / failure determination random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S602), the state B table (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the winning is based on the high-probability normalization determination based on the value “0” to “238”) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the low base state is set (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the low-probability normal / failure determination based on the table (the hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal map win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the display is stopped. A normal symbol (unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning (per normal map) is determined in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per display to be stopped (per symbol in the general pattern) is determined (S607), and the per-normal symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved storage in the ordinary figure storage area, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth ordinary figure storage area is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), it is first determined whether or not the normal symbol change time has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to “3” (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit normal symbol or a missing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol success / failure determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the usual figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is an opening pattern that repeats opening for 1.8 seconds three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is opened as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state A and state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which 0.9 seconds are opened three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this process is terminated.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end-of-common-use flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win. If it is determined that the normal flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), it is then determined whether or not it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second start port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second start port is executed (S1004), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened) Whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed is determined (S1005). If it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the second start port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that the second start port is closed (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second start port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and the base map end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. The second start port opening counter becomes “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the state B (high base state). In the state C (low base state), when the second start port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per map is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. Then, the usual figure end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the ordinary figure flag is turned OFF (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) following the normal operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize apparatus (the first big prize apparatus 31 and the second big prize apparatus 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. If “Special figure 1 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing is performed (S1102), and “Special figure 1 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if “Special figure 1 operation status” is “3” (both NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), Special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106) is performed, and when “Special figure 1 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5” (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. In addition, since the small bonus is not set as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small bonus is set as a result of the first special symbol successful / bad determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 waiting process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls (that is, the number of retained balls in Special Figure 1) at the first start port 20 is “0” (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “0”, that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in game (S1207). If it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is playing a game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a customer waiting demo screen). (S1208). If it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not “0”, that is, there is at least one random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201) NO), special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) to be described later. Here, “Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing” means that special figure 2 is not in a variable display (including a fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0”. Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Decision Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol adequacy determination random number counter (labeled-TRND-A) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether the other special symbol is successful or not, it is not determined whether or not it is a big hit. It is either off (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed during that time is: Everything is off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the fluctuation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) Based on the table (the big hit determination values are “3” and “397”), the determination is made (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the success / failure determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “5”, “7”, “311”, “313”, “317”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , “503”.

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is “big hit” (S1606). If the big hit is determined (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the big hit type (label −TRND−) AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), FIG. 1 The big hit fluctuation flag is set to ON (S1610), and the process is terminated. In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Further, when it is determined that the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, any one of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit is executed. . If it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, one of 15R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, and 2R seventh big hit is executed (see FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit fluctuation flag, the first special big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (the fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a fluctuation display related to the big hit (fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped), and the main control unit 80 A flag corresponding to the big hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to the small hit (a variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped). The flag corresponding to the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. When the big hit fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the big hit is being displayed), in the other special symbol winning / no-going determination, processing for determining whether or not the big hit is made is performed. Not performed. In other words, control is not performed in which both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is state A (whether or not it is a low probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referenced with reference to the state A big hit table (the portion corresponding to state A and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of variation time is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (reserved number) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number detachment table (state A in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

  Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (see FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected on the basis of the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the variation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. Thereby, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average variation time is shortened.

  If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) Is determined (S1708). If it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709) S1709: YES), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the fluctuation is based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B departure table (the portion corresponding to state B and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

  If it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is decided that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C departure table (the portion corresponding to state C and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is terminated. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure storage unit 85a is one level lower (for example, the first special figure storage unit 85a is made up of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , The address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol 1 changing process]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special diagram 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of special symbol variations executed during state B (high base state) 1 is subtracted (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is “0” (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is “0” (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if the low-accuracy high-base state is entered, the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) is entered. In the high-accuracy base state, “10000” is set in the state B counter. Therefore, even if the counter is subtracted for each change, the value of the state B counter is substantially “0”. Absent. That is, the highly accurate base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to “3” (S1908), and the special symbol fluctuation display is stopped according to the result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and jackpot type determination random number determination result. The process is performed (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) is in the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success / failure determination process or the variable display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901). If it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then, FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to special figure 2 is being executed It is determined whether or not (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process is terminated. And the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902) and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is set to ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the fluctuation display of special figure 1 can be interrupted temporarily.

  If it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, it is already determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), it is then decided whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the change display (time measurement of change time) of the 1st special symbol which was interrupted can be restarted.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol are displayed. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is interrupted, and a flag corresponding to interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002). The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned on (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. Thereby, in FIG. 1, it can be shown that the fluctuation display related to the big hit is ended (the big hit is confirmed) and the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that it is 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round, “15” is set to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times of one round (from opening to closing of the big prize opening) (S2005), and a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006) ), The special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2007), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not 15R big hit (NO in S2004), since the big hit type is 4R big hit, “4” is set to the value of the round counter (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can recognize that the special symbol variation display has been completed. As a result, a big hit standby state is established. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither big hit game nor small hit game starts, that is, because it is a fluctuation display related to a loss, the special figure 1 operation status Is set to “1” (S2009), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, a special figure 1 big hit flag ("first big hit flag" indicating that the result of the success / failure determination related to the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the success / failure determination relating to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag ("small hit flag") indicating that the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is determined is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hit game is executed, a small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is reached, a display mode such as “2RΔ4R ▲ 15RΔ” (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off) is displayed. Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process (FIG. 21 to FIG. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in S206), the following description is simplified.

[Special Figure 2 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation and the digestion of the second special symbol retention ("change display of the first special symbol and change display of the second special symbol", "determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol) The success / failure determination and “)” can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination of success / failure based on the entry to the second start opening (second special symbol success / failure determination) is more appropriate to the determination of the success / failure based on the entrance to the first start opening (first special symbol success / failure). Is more likely to be a big hit (a larger amount of profits can be acquired) for the player than the (determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each stage. If “Special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and “Special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “3” (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game When the special treatment 1 (S1108) is performed and the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), the special electric bonus treatment as a small hit game 2 (S1109) is performed. Note that the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211). Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol in parallel. This is because it is impossible to execute in parallel with the jackpot game related to 2 special symbols (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol correct / incorrect determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol success / failure determination It is determined whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that the game is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is terminated. The other processes are the same as those shown in FIG.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). To select the variation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

  In state C, the game is performed mainly based on the change display of the second special symbol (second special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in state C, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is more than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern of various times (various game effects can be executed) is selected. It is possible. In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the state A and the state B, the game is performed mainly by the change display of the first special symbol (first special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in the state A and the state B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the various special effects (various game effects can be obtained). A feasible variation pattern can be selected. Therefore, in the state A and the state B, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (the number of types is small). Further, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol.

  In addition, since the state A and the state B are gaming states in which the game is performed mainly with the first special symbol variation display, the second special symbol variation time shortening function is inactivated, and the second special symbol variation time is It is set long. Specifically, in the state A and the state B, when the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit. (P12 or P20). This is set to a variation time shorter than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit in the state A. In state B, the variation time is set to be shorter than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit.

  In states A and B, the second special symbol success / failure determination is not the main / failure determination, but if a too long variation time is set, the player who performed the success / failure determination for the big hit must execute it. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, when the result of the determination is a big hit, instead of setting a long time variation time unnecessarily, the variation time (the longest one) set in the first special symbol as the subject Set a shorter variation time. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, a fluctuation time that the player can stand by is set, and the player is disadvantaged such that the profit due to the big hit that has been earned cannot be obtained. Absent. In addition, since the possibility of generating a big hit is low and the profit obtained is large, such control is performed.

  In the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in the state B. Of the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in the states A and B, when the result of determining whether or not the second special symbol is successful is a small hit, the variable display time is longer than when the big hit and missed. Set.

  Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the success / failure determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently due to the execution of the second special symbol success / failure determination. In addition, if there is a situation where small hits can occur frequently, the malicious player performs the second special symbol success / failure determination in spite of being in a gaming state mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination. There is a risk that game profits may be obtained by small hits. For example, there is a possibility that a game profit may be unfairly obtained due to an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed. In order to prevent such a situation, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination that is not the subject is a small hit, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time (longest time), Prevents frequent occurrence of small hits (small hit games). In addition, since there are not so many gaming profits that can be acquired by one small hit game, the player who generated the small hit does not cause much damage.

  Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out of place, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in the state B. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol which is not the subject in the states A and B is shorter than the case where the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the fluctuation display time is longer than that when the big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out of place, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and in the gaming state in which the left-handed game should be performed The player is prevented from playing inappropriate games such as right-handed games. As another embodiment, the big hit and miss may be the same variation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds or both may be 600 seconds).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed, and this processing is completed. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2" and a special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the RAM output buffer to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. To do.

[Special symbol 2 changing process]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow (S1951 to S1959) as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Interrupt Processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs the processes (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different as shown in FIG.

[Special electric equipment processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102). If it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is next determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when the player launches a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol and the big hit is made, the big ball start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, after the big hit, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state where the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a toilet, drinks, and telephone. Then, after the end of the break, it is possible to advance the big hit game by firing the game ball at any timing of the player and passing the game ball through the start gate 29. The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) is all ended (the big hit game is ended) in the big hit game.

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and is determined not to be open. If it is (NO in S2104), is it time to open the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, has it reached the time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time for starting the next round (next release) has come (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the time to start the round (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening release process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of jackpot.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the grand prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening in the round is the maximum number of balls that are specified (this implementation) In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30), that is, the big prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned OFF (S2123), special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the big hit standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102). Transition to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . In other words, during execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), a big hit game is started (round game is opened). The big hit start flag is set to ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed through the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine is continued in the big hit waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. Thereby, the player can start (promote) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game that has ended this time is related to a probable big hit (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, five types of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, 15R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit are probable big hits, and in S2201, these big hit games are It is determined whether any of the five types is applicable. If it is determined that it is a probable big hit (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned on (S2202), and then the finished big hit game is either 4R third big hit or 2R sixth big hit. It is determined whether or not there is (S2203).

  If it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is either 4R third big hit or 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state B counter is set to “10000”. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state is set up to 10000 times at the maximum after the big hit game is finished, and the high base state is established. The special symbol fluctuation display cannot be executed 10,000 times during the business day of the amusement store, so setting the state B counter to “10000” effectively generates the next big hit. This means that the high base state (state B) is continued. Instead of the control for setting the number of times such as “10000” times in the state B, the high base state (state) may be maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is not 4R third big hit or 2R sixth big hit (NO in S2203), that is, the finished big hit game is 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, Alternatively, if it is determined that it is one of 15R fifth big hits (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag kept OFF. Thereby, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state.

  In S2201, if it is determined that it is not a probable big hit, that is, a low probability big hit (low probability big hit, normal big hit) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the state B counter “100” is set (S2207), and the process ends. As a result, the high base state is set 100 times after the big hit game ends, and the low probability high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the operation is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric equipment processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), it is first determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hitting end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has ended in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35), that is, the opening time per unit has elapsed Then, it is determined whether or not the time for starting the first opening operation has been reached, or the time for the interval between the plurality of times of opening has elapsed and the time for starting the next opening operation has been reached (S2303). . As for the small hit game, regardless of passing the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time elapses after the fixed stop symbol is displayed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big prize opening (YES in S2303), the second big prize opening 35 is opened according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of balls has not been reached (10) (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, the predetermined prize is opened after the big prize opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). If it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the big prize opening (second grand prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hitting opening counter is set. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hitting release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the processing is ended as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit end process to end the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), a small hit ending period is started (S2312), a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes “0” when the large winning opening is opened six times.

  Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), 6 opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have entered) It is determined whether or not the small ending time has elapsed (S2315). If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is terminated. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate and low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls, which enhances the fun of the game. Note that the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. In addition, when the small hit game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 waiting process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) subsequent to the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current gaming machine status (whether it is probable, whether it is a winning game, the number of held balls, (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a unique effect that is not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination (the first special symbol (also referred to as “first information”) or the second special symbol (also referred to as “second information”). A high probability state (given a privilege) based on a pattern (also referred to as a “specific display mode”), and a high probability state (privilege) when a predetermined condition is established. Is supposed to end.

  The process of giving this high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as “privilege grant means”. Since the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the variable display and the stop display are performed, and the same determination result is obtained. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the bonus symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, timer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, data related to presentation control at the time of power interruption such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) at power-on after power-off such as a power failure (power-off recovery), effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. Will return to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. For the effect determination random number, a random effect determination random number for determining the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), a notice effect determining random number for determining the notice effect, and an effect symbol determining for the effect symbol There are random numbers. The random number update method may be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be added two by two instead of adding one by one. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (start start ball command) notifying that a start ball has been received is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of variation from the main control board 80) ( For example, when a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a later-described variation effect pattern is determined. The storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transferred to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control. It transmits to the control board which becomes a corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.) are executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screens of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. In addition, it is possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of a movable decorative member, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is finished. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed whenever an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for emitting lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition processing Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display content of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start incoming command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that a start incoming command has not been received (NO in S4401). When the process proceeds to S4403 and it is determined that the start pitching command is received (YES in S4401), the production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage process (S4402) is a process for determining various kinds of information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination disturbance) included in the start ball entering command (Special Figure 1 start ball entering command or Special Figure 2 start ball entering command) received in S4401. (Game information such as numerical value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special figure holding balls at the time of sending and receiving the start incoming ball command (at the time of command generation) In the shift memory format, the information is stored in a predetermined production hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For example, if the received start pitch command is a special Fig. 1 start pitch command corresponding to the number of held balls "4" in Fig. 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special map 1 start pitch command Are stored as special figure 1 production hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 production hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used to execute various effects such as a change effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the effect hold information storage area (effect hold information) in the sub control board 90 are the special figure hold storage parts (first special figure hold storage part, second special figure) in the main control board (main control part) 80 described above. This is consistent with the stored content (acquired information) of the hold storage unit. From this, it can be said that the production hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process (described later) ( S4404) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. A variation effect end process to be ended is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop effect is displayed, and the variation effect (effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the change stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the change effect end process. The variation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). Specifically, the start of the big hit game (occurrence of big hit game) ) Opening command sent at the time of the round, round start command sent at the start of the round, round end command sent at the end of the round, ending command sent at the end of the big hit game, the first big winning prize in the round game For example, the first big prize entry command sent based on the entry to 30th, the second big prize entry command sent based on the entry to the second big prize entry in the small hit game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands is received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command for specifying an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command Set the round production command that specifies the round production according to the round specified based on the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, the ending that specifies the ending production according to the jackpot type specified based on the command Set the production command in the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a winning game entry command (first winning game entry command, second winning game entry command), a winning game specified based on the command (first winning game) The entrance effect command designating the entrance effect corresponding to the entrance to the entrance 30 and the second grand prize opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When the various effect commands related to the set winning game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect or a round according to the progress of the winning game. An effect, a ball effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command and a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start processing (S4404), first, effect determination random number processing (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as a random effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, an effect symbol determination random number, and the like. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the variation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the effect design game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including presence / absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information designating the current gaming state, determination of first special symbol success determination or second special symbol success determination The result includes symbol information for designating the jackpot type (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and a variation corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variation display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining an effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status “1” corresponds to effect mode A, mode status “2” corresponds to effect mode B, mode status “3” corresponds to effect mode C, and mode status “4” corresponds to effect mode B. Corresponding to the production mode D, the mode status “5” corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly of the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the aspect of the effect pattern 8 (for example, the pattern design, the number design, etc.) or the characters, items, and background images that appear is different. It will be different. In addition, the production symbol game production can be executed in a mode corresponding to the production mode, and when providing a plurality of game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.), different game production can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be. In the present embodiment, the production modes A and B are executed when the low-accuracy low base state is controlled, and the production modes C and D are executed when the high-accuracy low base state is controlled. Is executed when the low-accuracy base state is controlled and when the high-accuracy base state is controlled. Therefore, when the production mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the production mode to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, the change display is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is controlled by the sub-control unit 90 (variation effect pattern, effect design). A variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining (game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the change effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the gaming state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), as a variation presentation pattern determination table, the big hit time corresponding to the current presentation mode A variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the variation pattern of the effect symbol etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode status) corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the variation effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect design game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect game effect), when the character effect performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character In the case where the effect is not executed (non-reach effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined. The reach effect is, for example, that the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same as the display pattern of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination indicates that it is a big win In the case where a mode (a big hit mode, a specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with a symbol (the same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode Whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbols (three identical effect symbols) that complete the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one is continuously displayed in a variable manner (scroll display). This refers to the production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the variation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect character is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, in S4505, based on the effect design determination random number acquired in S4501 and a stop design determination table (not shown), an effect design 8 (also referred to as “stop effect design”) to be displayed is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is that the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of reach, and if the reach is out of reach, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as “787” are displayed. Among them, one effect symbol is different from the other effect symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one effect symbol of three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as “635” is the other The production pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect to be executed in association with a variation effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. Moreover, it is also called an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. This notice effect is an effect (preliminary) that indicates the possibility that the result of the effect effect game effect being executed will be stopped and displayed in a big win mode before the effect symbol is stopped (determination stop display) Notification effect). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the notice effect obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, the designated change pattern and the notice effect suitable for the determined change effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the change effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), the variation production start process is terminated. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the fluctuation display (flashing display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like based on the change effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 On the display screen 7a, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started. An effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variation display of the effect symbol 8.

  In principle, the variation of the effect symbol 8 is “1” → “2” → “3”... → “7” → “8” → “9” (ascending order). Vertical scrolling) is performed by returning to “1” again when reaching “9” and repeating vertical scrolling. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the above-described variation effect pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various display modes such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are switched sequentially on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide a mode as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a variation display mode according to the effect mode and the gaming state.

  In addition, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. In this embodiment, the variation display is stopped. A plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) are provided as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) The stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the design symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is “left symbol”. → Stop mode (also referred to as “first stop mode”) with “middle symbol → right symbol”, and (2) stop mode with “(left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol)” as the stop order of each symbol (“ (Also referred to as “second stop mode”) and (3) a stop mode (also referred to as “third stop mode”) in which all stop timings (stop timings) of the symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as “simultaneous stop”). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and the middle symbol thereafter stops. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and it is determined in which stop mode the variable display is stopped depending on the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) can be performed separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “first stop symbol”, the second stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “second stop symbol”, and the stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also referred to as “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination result being “small” mainly in the production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that it is “winning”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in (1) production mode A and B (state A). In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that, in the case of (2) the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “hit” On the basis of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C ( In the state C), the variation display when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” or “big hit” It is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping

  The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the circumstances (1) In the production modes A and B (state A), the function of the shortening variation according to the number of special figure holding balls works. The special figure 1 reserve ball number is “3” or “4”) and the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out”, and based on this, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal variation , (2) In the production mode E (state B), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal fluctuation based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination being “out”, and (3 ) Stopping the variation display when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” in the production mode C (state C) This is a stop mode that can be executed.

  The fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) is that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in the production mode C (state C). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on reach variation, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “hit” This is a stop mode that can be executed when the change display is stopped when the change display of the effect design 8 is performed with reach change.

  In this manner, a plurality of stop modes when stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 8 are provided depending on the effect mode (game state) and the variation display mode and the result (stop display mode) based on the result of the special symbol success / failure determination. Thus, the stop mode can be varied depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops, it is possible to guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 displayed (derived display) thereafter. Through this stop mode, it is possible to infer the types of special games that can be executed, the presence / absence of execution, the possibility, and the like. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display stops and to give a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes described above, for example, a stop mode (fifth stop mode) in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol”. ), And a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same, and the right symbol is stopped thereafter (sixth stop mode). The conditions under which the aspect is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be variously determined.

  In this embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that the symbols can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in state A (effect modes A and B), “7” among the odd symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and other odd symbols are “1” and “3”. , “5”, “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue”). It is also called “design”. On the other hand, in states B and C (production modes C, D, and E), “3”, “5”, and “7” are red symbols among odd symbols, and “1” and “9” are odd symbols other than these. Are green symbols, and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols.

  Note that the correspondence relationship between the pattern and the color shown in the present embodiment is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be taken. The color type is not limited to the present embodiment, and other colors may be used. Can be used. In the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it can be determined by elements other than colors. For example, the type of character when the character is attached to the production symbol, and the numeric design in the case of having the production design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the production design representing the number (numeric design) The symbol type may be determined depending on the character symbol, and furthermore, the symbol type may be determined merely based on the odd symbol and the even symbol.

  The effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above. The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as the basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the “completely broken eyes” (“124”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers) and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, such as “reach rose eyes” (“343”, etc. ) Is a detachment mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the winning game. On the other hand, “Zoro eyes” (“777”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same are used as a big hit mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a big hit game of 4R or higher (see FIG. 6). Yes.

  Assuming such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, the “reach ballet” is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R jackpot game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of winning prize balls) that the player can acquire than the jackpot game of 4R or higher (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession) in a small hit game compared to (probably low base state), that is, for the player This is because it is a special game with a relatively low advantage (profit amount). In addition, the “completely broken eyes” among the broken eyes are also used as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, since the second start port 21 is in an open state for most of the period, the small winning big winning port (the second winning port) located on the downstream side of the second start port 21 (second This is because it is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35), and the possibility of obtaining a profit by small hits is extremely low (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Furthermore, a “specific breaker”, which will be described later, among the breakers is a small hit mode that triggers the execution of a small hit game (second special symbol small hit) in the state C (highly accurate low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific rosette) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hit mode (bottled eyes) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Among the eye), the reach variation eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and the out-of-focus mode (complete break eye, reach variation eye) is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  In addition, since the state A (low probability low base state) is a gaming state that is basically based on the left-handed game, the first special symbol propriety determination (firstly based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (first) 1 special symbol variation display) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol success / failure determination (second special symbol variation display) is performed during the first special symbol variation display. When the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed under the circumstances, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation by the production display 102 is performed. Only display (and stop display) is performed. Similarly, state B (high base state) is a gaming state in which right-handed gaming is basically performed, and the first special symbol success / failure determination (first special symbol determination based mainly on entering the second starting port 21) This is the case because it is rare that the second special symbol determination (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed below, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display ( And stop display).

  Similarly, since the state C (highly accurate low base state) is a gaming state that is based on the right-handed game, the second special symbol propriety determination (mainly based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 ( Since the second special symbol variation display) is performed, it is rare that the first special symbol success / failure determination (first special symbol variation display) is performed during the second special symbol variation display. When the first special symbol determination is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to the first special symbol is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but by the production display 102. Only variable display (and stop display) is performed.

  However, when a special symbol win / rejection determination that is contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a determination result of “big hit” is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol correct / incorrect determination is made) If the result is a big hit), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 provide an effect display that suggests the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (the change display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the change display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player loses the opportunity to gain profits by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the jackpot.

  Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 53 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following description, the description of the configuration and processing common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is omitted, and mainly the description of the configuration and processing different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. Do. In the second embodiment, the display screen of the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3) is called the first display screen 7a, and the display screen of the second image display device 71 (see FIG. 1) is the second display screen. The display screen of the third image display device 72 (see FIG. 2) is referred to as a third display screen 72a.

  In addition to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b described in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has a first effect button on the front frame 51 as input means that can be input by the player. A cross key is provided at a position close to 63a. The cross key includes an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. When the player operates any of the cross keys, the first display screen 7a and the third key are displayed. It is possible to change the selection of the item displayed on the display screen 72a or to highlight an item different from the highlighted item.

  As illustrated in FIG. 53, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, in addition to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, a key for detecting that any one of the cross keys has been operated. An operation detection switch 63e is connected. When the player operates any of the cross keys (up key, down key, left key, or right key), a detection signal is output to the sub-control board 90 to notify that key operation has been detected. Note that different detection signals are output when the upper key is operated, when the lower key is operated, when the left key is operated, and when the right key is operated. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 can specify which of the four keys constituting the cross key is operated based on the detection signal from the key operation detection switch 63e. It is.

[About various settings related to production]
Next, various settings relating to effects will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various settings of effects. As illustrated in FIG. 54, the settings relating to the effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment are roughly classified into a first setting and a second setting.

(Example of first setting)
Examples of the first setting include volume adjustment and light amount adjustment as illustrated in FIG. The volume adjustment is a function of adjusting the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the player operates the cross key and the first key while the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55B) described later is displayed. The volume of the effect sound can be changed by performing a predetermined operation using the effect button 63a. The light amount adjustment is a function for adjusting the light amount of the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. The player can use the cross key and the first key while the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed. The light quantity of the three display screens can be changed by performing a predetermined operation using the effect button 63a.

(Example of second setting)
As the second setting, as exemplified in FIG. 54, there are a premier mode, a single notification mode, a prefetch reduction mode, an auto button, a back button suggestion, and a high tone adjustment.

  The premier mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which a so-called “premier effect” that occurs only when the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”, that is more likely to occur than usual, is an effect customization screen (described later) The player can switch between the premier mode and the non-premier mode by performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a in a state where the screen shown in FIG. 55 (C) is displayed. In addition, as a premier effect, a special character called a premier character is displayed on the screen before the effect symbol indicating that the special symbol is determined to be “big hit” is stopped and displayed. An example of such an effect is as follows.

  The single notification mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which a definite notification effect called “single notification” that occurs only when the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit” is more likely to occur than usual. Yes, when the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a in a state in which the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C) is displayed, the one notification mode and the non-one notification mode are set. Can be switched. As a single announcement, a predetermined notification sound is output from the speaker 67 before the effect symbol indicating that the special symbol is determined to be “big hit” is stopped and displayed. In addition, an effect of causing the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light in rainbow colors is an example.

  The pre-reading reduction mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which a so-called “pre-reading effect” that is executed based on the result of the above-described pre-determination (pre-determination result) is less likely to occur than usual. When the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a in a state where (see (C)) is displayed, it is possible to switch between the prefetch reduction mode and the non-prefetch reduction mode. As an example of the pre-reading effect, a reserved pre-reading effect that displays a hold image (hold icon) indicating that the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is appropriate is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode.

  The auto button is a function for generating an operation-compatible effect in the same way as when the first effect button 63a is operated without operating the first effect button 63a, and an effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C) is displayed. In this state, the player can perform a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a to switch the function related to the auto button between “ON” and “OFF”.

  The back button suggestion is a so-called “operation-related effect is executed when the player operates the first effect button 63a during an effective period without an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. “Back button” is a function that suggests that it is during the effective period, and the player uses the cross key and the first operation button 63a to perform a predetermined operation in a state in which the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C) is displayed. It is possible to switch between “ON” and “OFF” of the function related to the back button suggestion. By setting the back button suggestion to “ON”, for example, the button lamp built in the first effect button 63a emits light during the above-described effective period.

  The treble adjustment is a function of cutting the high range of the effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the player can use the cross key and the first effect button while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C) is displayed. By performing a predetermined operation using 63a, it is possible to switch between “ON” and “OFF” of the function relating to the treble adjustment.

(Characteristics of various settings)
So far, the outline of various settings classified into the first setting or the second setting has been described, but the first setting and the second setting have the following characteristics.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the game effect non-progression state (non-progression progress state) in which the game effect that causes the effect symbol to be variably displayed with the variation display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is not performed. If the first time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the transition to the non-progression state of the game effect without ending the non-progression state of the game effect, the non-gaming reset selection screen (FIG. 57). Browse) is displayed. This non-game reset selection screen is a selection screen that is displayed when one or a plurality of settings classified as the second setting is different from the initial setting, and is classified as the second setting. It is a screen for a player to select whether various settings to be reset collectively (return to initial settings) or not.

  By the way, the non-game reset selection screen is not limited to a case where a certain player (first player) temporarily suspends and resumes a game, but another player (second player) starts a game. Although it is also displayed, the premier mode, single announcement mode, look-ahead reduction mode, auto button, back button suggestion will change the game effect or affect the game effect, the second game When a player starts a game, it is preferable that the second player can easily select whether or not to reset these second settings (set by the first player). Further, if at least one performance setting classified as the second setting has been made, the content of the second setting is displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 56), and the content is the other player. It is preferable that the first player stops the game without being given the opportunity to select whether or not to reset the second setting because it may be known to the (for example, the second player). Absent.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the first time (here, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state, the effect setting (here, the second setting is classified). Display of the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is started as a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return the initial settings to the initial settings, and this non-game reset selection screen is displayed. In the middle, there is a configuration in which various settings classified as the second setting, that is, a change operation for the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C) cannot be performed (for example, a configuration in which the effect customization screen is not displayed). Adopted (see FIG. 54).

  For example, if the first time is set to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds, for example, the game ball is not easily won at the first start port 20 in the low-probability base state, and the game effect frequently does not progress. , The non-gaming reset selection screen is often displayed, and as a result, there is a possibility that the first player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the first time is set to a relatively long time, for example, 30 seconds, the waiting time until the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started after the first player stops the game is increased. In view of the fact that the setting of 2 can be easily reset by the first player, this configuration is not preferable. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the first time is set to 10 seconds in consideration of these points.

  On the other hand, even if the volume of the speaker 67 and the light amount of each display screen are set differently from the initial settings, the contents of the game effects are not changed or the game effects are not greatly affected. Compared with the setting of 2, it is considered that it is less necessary for the player (for example, the first player) to select whether or not to reset the first setting. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the display of the non-game reset selection screen, priority is given to the player's selection as to whether or not to reset the various effect settings classified as the second setting. In addition, when the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment cannot be performed and the reset is selected on the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57), that is, an operation for performing the selection to return the production setting to the initial setting is performed. If this is done while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-game reset selection screen (selection promotion effect) ends and the second setting is reset (returned to the initial setting). A configuration is adopted in which the first setting is not reset (not returned to the initial setting) (see FIG. 54).

  By the way, regarding the volume of the speaker 67 and the amount of light on each display screen, even if the second player knows the contents of the setting made by the first player, there is no major problem, and whether or not the first player resets. It is considered that there is little need to adopt a configuration that can select any of these. On the other hand, for example, the volume of the speaker 67 is set to the maximum (in the second embodiment, “5” in five stages: see FIG. 55B), and the next of the first player is kept. When the second player, who is a player, starts playing, a large volume of game effect sound is output from the speaker 67 with the start of the game effect, surprises the second player, and makes the second player feel uncomfortable. There is a possibility of giving. Further, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is left in a state where the light amount of each display screen is set to the minimum (in this embodiment, “1” in five stages: see FIG. 55B), Even if the customer waiting effect using the display screen is performed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not conspicuous, and it is considered difficult to improve the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the second time (5 minutes in the second embodiment) elapses without ending the game effect non-progression state after shifting to the game effect non-progression state, Without prompting the player to select whether or not to reset the volume / light quantity setting, the volume of the speaker 67 and the light quantity of each display screen are automatically reset (returned to their initial settings). Specifically, the volume of the speaker 67 is returned to “1” which is the minimum volume among the five levels, and the light quantity of each display screen is returned to “5” which is the maximum light quantity among the five levels.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the initial setting of the volume of the speaker 67 is “1” which is the minimum volume and the initial setting of the light quantity of each display screen is “5” which is the maximum light quantity will be described as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the initial setting of the volume of the speaker 67 may be a volume other than the minimum volume, and the initial setting of the light quantity of each display screen is a light quantity other than the maximum light quantity. May be. For example, the volume of the speaker 67 may be returned to the middle “3” of the five levels, and the light quantity of each display screen may be returned to the middle “3” of the five levels.

  In addition, after the selection of whether or not the production setting is reset on the non-game reset selection screen and the display of the non-game reset selection screen is finished, the player adjusts the volume and light amount described later. It is possible to change the volume and light amount by displaying a screen.

<Specific Examples of Various Screens Displayed on Third Display Screen 72a>
Next, various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 55 is a screen diagram illustrating various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a.

(Customization reception screen)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the game effect progressing state in which the game effect is displayed in a state where the effect symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and the game described above. When the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is not displayed in the effect non-progression state, the customization acceptance screen illustrated in FIG. 55 (A) is displayed on the third display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. Is done. This customization reception screen includes a cross key image simulating a cross key and a message such as “You can customize the production” to inform you that it is possible to change various settings related to the production. Has been.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 55A, the cross key image constituting the customization acceptance screen is displayed in a display mode in which the left key and the right key are different from the upper key and the lower key. Specifically, for example, the left key and the right key are highlighted than the up key and the down key. For this reason, a player who has viewed the cross key image can switch the customization acceptance screen to another screen for actually customizing the presentation by operating the left key or the right key of the cross key. It can be easily recognized.

(Customized number notification image, customized content notification image)
Further, when any one of the settings classified as the second setting (see FIG. 54) has been changed from the initial setting, the upper part of the third display screen 72a is displayed while the customization acceptance screen is displayed. A customized number notification image and a customized content notification image are displayed in the area. Here, the customized number notification image is an image that notifies the number of settings that are different from the initial settings based on the player's selection operation among the various settings classified as the second setting. In FIG. 55A, a customized number notification image including the characters “production customization 3” is displayed to notify that the number of settings different from the initial setting is three. This is illustrated.

  FIG. 56 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the customized number notification image and the customization content notification image displayed on the third display screen 72a. Here, the customized number notification image is as described above with reference to FIG. On the other hand, the customized content notification image is an image that sequentially notifies the content of the settings that are different from the initial settings among the various settings classified as the second setting (FIG. 55A, FIG. 56 (A) to (C)).

  For example, as illustrated in FIG. 54B, among the various settings classified as the second setting, the initial setting is related to the three settings of “Premier mode”, “Prefetch reduction mode”, and “Back button suggestion”. When a setting different from the setting is made, for example, after the customized content notification image (see FIG. 56A) including the characters “Premier mode” is displayed for 1.5 seconds, the characters “Prefetch reduction mode” are displayed. A customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (B)) including “” is displayed for 1.5 seconds, followed by a customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (C)) including the characters “back button suggestion”. Displayed for seconds. Then, after the customized content notification image (see FIG. 56 (C)) including the letters “back button suggestion” is displayed for 1.5 seconds, the customized content notification image including the characters “premier mode” (FIG. 56 ( A) Reference) is displayed again.

  As described above, when a plurality of settings among the various settings classified as the second setting are set differently from the initial settings, characters indicating the contents of the plurality of settings are sequentially switched, In addition, the display of the customized content notification image is appropriately updated so as to be repeatedly displayed.

  By the way, for example, as described above, when the setting of “Premier mode”, “Prefetch reduction mode”, and “Back button suggestion” is different from the initial setting, the characters “Premier mode” are included. It may be possible to adopt a configuration in which a customized content notification image, a customized content notification image including characters of “look-ahead reduction mode”, and a customized content notification image including characters of “back button suggestion” are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. It is done.

  However, in this configuration, the number of customized content notification images displayed on the third display screen 72a increases as the number of effects that are set differently from the initial setting increases. There is a possibility that a problem that it becomes difficult to use it for an effect (for example, an effect for displaying a character or a character for notifying the jackpot reliability) may occur.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the number of settings in which the setting different from the initial setting in the second setting is notified by the customization number notification image, and the number of customizations In the display area (an example of the first display area) immediately below the display area (an example of the second display area) in which the notification image is displayed, a customized content notification image that sequentially shows the contents of the settings different from the initial settings is displayed. The For this reason, it is possible to easily notify the player of the number and contents of the settings different from the initial settings while suppressing the occurrence of the above problems.

  The customized number notification image and the customized content notification image are displayed in the same manner in the upper area of the third display screen 72a even during the display of the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57). For this reason, the player confirms the number and contents of the settings that are different from the initial settings based on the customized number notification image and the customized content notification image, and whether or not to reset these settings. Can be determined.

(Volume / light intensity adjustment screen)
Returning to the description of FIG. 55, when the player operates (presses) the left key or the right key while the customization acceptance screen (see FIG. 55A) is displayed, the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is displayed on the third display screen 72a. Is displayed (see FIG. 55B). Specifically, the text “volume” constituting the volume image included in the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is highlighted, and the volume can be adjusted. The volume / light quantity adjustment screen includes a volume image, a light quantity image, a first cross key image, a second cross key image, and a first effect button image.

  Here, the volume image (see FIG. 55B) is a display object that is highlighted among five display objects each including any number “1” to “5” and having different sizes. It is an image which shows a volume by the number of. The light quantity image (see FIG. 55B) depends on the number of display objects that are highlighted among five display objects each including any number of “1” to “5” and having different sizes. It is an image which shows light quantity.

  The first effect button image (see FIG. 55 (B)) is an image that imitates the first effect button 63a, and the word “OK” is displayed immediately below the first effect button image. Therefore, the player determines (confirms) the volume / light quantity changed (increased / decreased) by operating the cross key while the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is displayed by operating (pressing) the first effect button 63a. It is easy to recognize that it is possible to

  The second cross key image (see FIG. 55B) is a cross key image displayed between the first cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and the down key are the left key and It is highlighted rather than the right key. The characters “increase / decrease” are displayed immediately below the second cross key image. For this reason, the player who has seen the second cross key image and the character immediately below can increase or decrease the volume (or light amount) by operating the upper key or the lower key of the cross key. It can be easily recognized.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 55B, the display object including the “volume” character constituting the sound volume image is highlighted more than the display object including the “light amount” character configuring the light amount image. ing. In this state, the volume can be adjusted, and the player can increase or decrease the volume by operating the up key or the down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55B, the display object including the character “1” and the display object including the character “2” are highlighted, so that the current volume is “2” out of five levels. It has been shown. On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key once, the display object including the character “1” is highlighted, and the player operates the first effect button 63a to adjust the volume. Is changed to the minimum “1”. On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the up key twice, four display objects from the display object including the character “1” to the display object including the character “4” are highlighted, and the player When the first effect button 63a is operated, the volume is changed to “4”.

  The first cross key image (see FIG. 55B) is a cross key image displayed on the left side of the second cross key image. The left key and the right key are highlighted than the up key and the down key. ing. A character “switch” is displayed immediately below the first cross key image. For this reason, the player who has seen the first cross key image and the character immediately below it operates the left key of the cross key to customize the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55A). It is possible to easily recognize that it can be changed to a state in which the light amount can be adjusted by operating the right key.

  When the player operates the right key of the cross key only once in a state where the volume / light quantity adjustment screen illustrated in FIG. 55B is displayed, a display object including the characters “volume” constituting the volume image Instead, the display object including the characters “light quantity” constituting the light quantity image is highlighted. This state is a state in which the light amount can be adjusted as described above, and the player can increase or decrease the light amount by operating the up key or the down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55B, the display object including the character “4” is highlighted from the display object including the character “1”, so that the current light amount is “4” out of five levels. It is shown. On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key twice, the display object including the character “1” and the display object including the character “2” are highlighted, and the player becomes the first The light amount is changed to “2” by operating the effect button 63a. Conversely, for example, when the player operates the up key once, all five display objects from the display object including the character “1” to the display object including the character “5” are highlighted, and the game When the person operates the first effect button 63a, the volume is changed to the maximum “5”.

(Direction customization screen)
In addition, when the display object including the characters “light quantity” is highlighted, that is, when the volume / light quantity adjustment screen indicating that the light quantity can be adjusted is displayed, the player operates the right key once. Then, the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is switched to an effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C). The effect customization screen includes a premier mode setting image, a single notification mode setting image, a look-ahead reduction mode setting image, an auto button setting image, a back button suggestion setting image, a treble adjustment setting image, and a third cross. It has a key image, a fourth cross key image, and a first effect button image.

  Here, the premier mode setting image is an image showing the setting state of the premier mode, and in a state where the premier mode is not set, the characters “OFF” are highlighted, and instead of the characters “OFF”, As illustrated in FIG. 55C, when the character “ON” is highlighted, the premium mode is set. The one notification mode setting image is an image showing the setting state of the one notification mode, and the characters “OFF” are highlighted in a state where the one notification mode is not set (see FIG. 55C). ) When the character “ON” is highlighted instead of the character “OFF”, the single notification mode is set.

  The look-ahead reduction mode setting image is an image showing the setting state of the look-ahead reduction mode. In a state where the look-ahead reduction mode is not set, the character “OFF” is highlighted, and instead of the character “OFF”, As illustrated in FIG. 55C, when the character “ON” is highlighted, the prefetch reduction mode is set. The auto button setting image is an image showing the setting state of the auto button. In a state where the function of the auto button is not valid, the characters “OFF” are highlighted (see FIG. 55C), and “OFF”. When the character “ON” is highlighted instead of the character “”, the auto button function is enabled.

  The back button suggestion setting image is an image showing the setting state of the back button suggestion. When the back button suggestion function is not effective, the character “OFF” is highlighted, and the character “OFF” is used instead. As illustrated in FIG. 55C, when the character “ON” is highlighted, the back button suggestion function becomes effective. The treble adjustment setting image is an image showing the setting state of the treble adjustment, and the character “OFF” is highlighted when the treble adjustment function is not effective (see FIG. 55C), and “OFF”. When the character “ON” is highlighted instead of the character “”, the treble adjustment function is enabled.

  The first effect button image (see FIG. 55C) is an image simulating the first effect button 63a, and is used for switching between “ON” and “OFF” of the setting image where the cursor is located. Immediately below this first effect button image, a “decision change” character is displayed. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55C, the cursor is positioned so as to surround the item image including the characters of “one notification mode” constituting the one notification mode setting image, and “OFF "Is highlighted, the player operates the first effect button 63a (instead of the" OFF "character), the" ON "character is highlighted, and the one notification mode is set. Is set.

  The fourth cross key image (see FIG. 55C) is an image displayed between the third cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and the down key are from the left key and the right key. Is also highlighted. A character “move cursor” is displayed immediately below the fourth cross key image. For this reason, the player who has seen the fourth cross key image and the character immediately below can move the cursor up and down by operating the up key or the down key of the cross key. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55C, the player operates the lower key of the cross key once in a situation where the cursor is positioned so as to surround the item image including the characters of “one notification mode”. Then, the cursor moves downward so as to surround the item image including the characters of the “look-ahead reduction mode” instead of the item image including the characters of the “single notification mode”. When the player operates the first effect button 63a in this state, the character “ON” is highlighted instead of the character “OFF” in the prefetch reduction mode setting image, and the prefetch reduction mode is set.

  As illustrated in FIG. 55C, when the presentation customization is performed so that the characters “ON” are strongly displayed for the three setting images, the customization including the “production customization three” characters is included. A number notification image (see FIG. 55A) is displayed.

  The third cross key image (see FIG. 55C) is a cross key image displayed on the left side of the fourth cross key image. The left key and the right key are highlighted than the up key and the down key. ing. A character “switch” is displayed immediately below the third cross key image. For this reason, the player who saw the third cross key image and the character immediately below switches the effect customization screen to the volume / light quantity adjustment screen and operates the right key by operating the left key of the cross key. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the effect customization screen can be switched to the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55D).

(In-game reset selection screen)
When the player operates the right key of the cross key while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C) is displayed, the effect customization screen is switched to the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55D). As shown in FIG. 55 (D), this in-game reset selection screen includes a message “Do you want to reset the production settings?”, A selection item “No”, a selection item “Yes”, A fifth cross key image and a first effect button image are included.

  Here, in the fifth cross key image, the up key and the down key are highlighted than the left key and the right key, and the player operates the up key or the down key of the cross key to select “No”. It is possible to move the cursor between the selected item and the selected item “Yes”. The first effect button image is an image that imitates the first effect button 63a, and the text “Determination” is displayed immediately below it.

  By the way, in the initial setting in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the premier mode setting image, the one-shot notification mode setting image, the look-ahead reduction mode setting image, the auto button on the above-described effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C) The setting image, the back button suggestion setting image, and the treble adjustment setting image are all in a state where the characters “OFF” are highlighted. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 55C, the player operates the up key or the down key of the cross key in a state in which the settings different from the initial settings are made with respect to the three settings. When the cursor is moved to the selection item “Yes” and the first effect button 63a is operated in this state, all the settings classified as the second setting are returned to the initial settings. Thereby, on the effect customization screen, all of the premier mode setting image, the one notification mode setting image, the prefetch reduction mode setting image, the auto button setting image, the back button suggestion setting image, and the high tone adjustment setting image are “OFF”. The character is highlighted.

(End screen)
Although not shown in the figure, when the player operates the right key of the cross key while the game reset selection screen is displayed, a predetermined end screen is displayed. In this end screen, a message “Do you want to finish the production setting?”, A selection item of “Yes”, a selection item of “No”, a cross key image similar to the fifth cross key image, 1 effect button image is displayed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a in a state where the cursor is positioned so as to surround the selection item of “Yes”, the effect setting ends, and the customization acceptance screen ( 55A) is displayed again.

(Non-game reset selection screen)
FIG. 57 is a screen diagram illustrating a non-game reset selection screen displayed on the first display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7. In FIG. 57, three effect symbols indicating “526” breakage are stopped and displayed in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed in the low probability low base state is “losing”. The state is shown as an example. Here, when the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is on hold, a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed after the first special symbol and the effect symbol for reporting the loss are stopped and displayed. When the time has elapsed, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol has been held is executed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol is started. On the other hand, when the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is determined is not held, the game effect non-progression state in which the game effect for variably displaying the effect symbol does not proceed continues, and the game effect non-progression state is entered. When the first time has elapsed (10 seconds in the second embodiment), a non-game reset selection screen is displayed (see FIG. 57).

  As shown in FIG. 57, this non-game reset selection screen includes a message “Setting production customization being reset?”, A selection item “Yes”, a selection item “No”, A cross key image in which the upper key and the lower key are highlighted than the left key and the right key, and a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a are included.

  In the non-game reset selection screen, the player can move the cursor to the selection item “Yes” or the selection item “No” by operating the up key or down key of the cross key. When the first effect button 63a is operated in a state where the cursor is positioned on the selection item “No”, the setting change made on the effect customization screen is maintained. Conversely, when the first effect button 63a is operated with the cursor positioned on the selection item “Yes”, the setting change made on the effect customization screen is reset and classified into the second setting. All the settings that are made will be returned to the initial settings.

  However, the non-game reset selection screen is a selection screen for resetting the second setting, and is not a selection screen for resetting the first setting. For this reason, the setting classified into the first setting in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a in a state where the cursor is positioned on the selection item “Yes” while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed. It is never reset. As described above, the setting classified as the first setting (in the second embodiment, the setting relating to the volume and the setting relating to the amount of light) shifts to the non-progression state of the game effect, and then the non-progression state of the game effect ends. It is reset to the initial setting on condition that a second time (for example, 5 minutes) has passed without being performed.

  Note that while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, it is necessary for the player to select whether to reset the effect setting, so that the right key or the left key of the cross key is operated. It is not preferable to display the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55B) or the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C). For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, in the lower area of the third display screen 72a, instead of the message “You can customize the production” (see FIG. 55A), Is displayed, and the cross key image is displayed translucently, for example, so that the player can easily be notified that the effect customization cannot be performed (see FIG. 57).

[Permitted period for various operations related to production settings]
Next, referring to FIG. 58, the permission period during which the volume / light quantity adjustment operation for the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) is permitted, and the effect customization for the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)). The permission period during which the operation is permitted and the permission period during which the reset selection operation for the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is permitted will be described. Here, FIG. 58 is a time chart illustrating the permission period of volume / light quantity adjustment, effect customization, and non-game reset selection.

  As exemplified in FIG. 58 (A), for example, when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state, in the situation where the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, the first special symbol of The effect symbol is variably displayed along with the variation display, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this way, in the game effect progress state in which the game effect in which the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation display of the first special symbol is intermittently performed, the customization reception screen described above based on FIG. It is displayed. For this reason, in the game effect progress state, the volume or light quantity adjustment screen is displayed by operating the left key or the right key of the cross key while the customization acceptance screen is displayed, The amount of light can be adjusted. Further, when the game effect progressing state is in progress, various settings classified as the second setting can be changed by displaying the effect customization screen by operating the left key or the right key of the cross key while the customization acceptance screen is displayed. Is possible.

  For this reason, it can be said that the game effect progress state is a permission period in which the volume / light quantity adjustment is permitted and the effect customization is permitted. Note that the non-game reset selection screen is displayed until the first time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) elapses after the game effect stops progressing, that is, after the effect symbol change display is not performed. The display of (see FIG. 57) is not started. For this reason, the period from the transition to the non-advanced state of the game effect until the first time elapses is also a permission period during which volume / light quantity adjustment and effect customization are permitted (see FIG. 58A).

  On the other hand, when the game effect no longer progresses and the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state, display of the non-game reset selection screen is started. While the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the operation of the left key and right key of the cross key is invalid (see the screen diagram of the third display screen 72a in FIG. 57). It is not possible to display the volume / light quantity adjustment screen or the production customization screen by operating the right key. For this reason, it can be said that the display of the non-game reset selection screen is a prohibited period in which volume / light quantity adjustment and effect customization are prohibited.

  FIG. 58 (A) shows that the effect customization is reset for the non-game reset selection screen while the game effect non-progression state continues even after the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state. The case where selection of whether to do is made is illustrated. In this case, the display of the non-game reset selection screen ends when the selection of whether or not to reset is made in the non-progression state of the game effect, and accordingly, volume / light quantity adjustment and effect customization are permitted. (See FIG. 58A).

  The non-game reset selection screen is a selection screen that is displayed when the game effect is not progressing, and is a selection screen that is not displayed when the game effect is progressing. For this reason, although not shown in FIG. 58, when a game ball is won at the first start port 20 in the game effect progressing state and the game effect non-progression state is shifted to the game effect progressing state, the game is not playing. The reset selection screen is deleted from the first display screen 7a, and accordingly, a transition is made to a permission period in which volume / light quantity adjustment and effect customization are permitted.

  FIG. 58B illustrates a case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol change simultaneously in the low probability low base state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the third start port 26 is always open. For this reason, it is possible to easily win the game ball at the third starting port 26 by making a right strike by the player, and in the low probability low base state, the second ball selected in accordance with this win is selected. As a special symbol variation pattern, a variation pattern having an extremely long variation time such as 600 seconds is easily selected (see FIG. 9). For this reason, when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may fluctuate simultaneously.

  On the other hand, in the low-probability low base state, one effect symbol is displayed in a variable / stopped manner in conjunction with the first special symbol, but is not displayed in a variable / stopped manner in conjunction with the second special symbol. . For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 58 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is terminated in the situation where the variation display of the second special symbol is continued in the low probability low base state, With the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol is also ended, and the game effect progressing state is shifted to the game effect non-progressing state.

  As described above, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shifted from the simultaneous variation state in which the first special symbol is simultaneously varied to the non-advanced state of the game effect, the game effect is not performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. When the first time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) elapses after the transition to the progress state, the non-game reset selection screen starts to be displayed, and accordingly, volume / light quantity adjustment and effect customization are prohibited. It will shift to a prohibited period.

  As is apparent from the notation of FIG. 58, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the volume / light quantity when a predetermined operation for adjusting the volume / light quantity is performed when the non-game reset selection screen is not displayed. While the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, even if a predetermined operation for adjusting the volume / light quantity is performed, the volume / light quantity change corresponding to the predetermined operation is not changed. It is configured as follows. If the selection of whether or not the various settings classified as the second setting are to be returned to the initial settings is made while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-game reset selection screen is terminated. Accordingly, the change of the volume and the light amount is permitted.

<Production control based on the first setting>
(Production sound output control)
When an operation for changing the volume is performed on the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55B), the following processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. That is, the RAM of the sub control board 90 stores volume information indicating the current volume. The effect control microcomputer 91 updates the volume information to indicate the volume selected by the player when a predetermined operation is performed on the volume / light quantity adjustment screen for changing the volume. Then, the sound control board 106 is caused to execute a process of outputting the effect sound (for example, the game effect sound output with the game effect) from the speaker 67 at the volume indicated by the updated volume information.

(Production image display control)
When an operation for changing the light amount is performed on the volume / light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment executes the following processing. That is, light amount information indicating the current light amount is stored in the RAM of the image control board 100. When the predetermined operation is performed on the volume / light amount adjustment screen for changing the light amount, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a light amount command for notifying that the operation for changing the light amount has been performed to the image control board 100. To do.

  The light amount command includes information indicating the light amount selected by the player, and the image control microcomputer 101 displays the light amount to indicate the light amount specified from the information included in the received light amount command. Update information. Then, the first image display device 7 and the second image display device are displayed such that the effect image is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a with the light amount indicated by the updated light amount information. 71 and display control of the third image display device 72 is executed.

<Production control based on the second setting>
(Premier mode)
When an operation for setting the premium mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the following processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub control board 90 stores a normal mode premier effect determination table and a premier mode premier effect determination table. These premier effect determination tables are used to determine whether or not to execute the premier effect when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed in the low probability low base state is “big hit”. In each table, random numbers are associated with “Premier effect” and “Premier effect”, respectively. Also, in the premier effect determination table for the premier mode, more random numbers are associated with “Premier effect” than in the normal mode premier effect determination table.

  When the variation control command 91 is received from the main control board 80 when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state, the production control microcomputer 91 is included in the variation start command. It is determined whether or not the current determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit” based on the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. Here, when it is determined that the game is a “hit”, processing for determining whether or not to execute the premier effect is performed.

  Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command related to “big hit” with respect to the premier production execution decision random number that is appropriately updated every time random number update processing is performed on the sub-control board 90. Is obtained as a random number for determining the premier performance execution. Normally, the premier effect is executed based on whether or not the acquired premier effect execution random number matches the random value associated with “Premier effect” in the normal mode premier effect determination table. Determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, when the operation for setting the premier mode is performed on the production customization screen and the premier mode is set, the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the acquired premier production execution decision random number is the premier mode premier. Whether or not to execute the premier effect is determined based on whether or not it matches the random value associated with “Premier effect” in the effect determination table.

  As described above, in the premier mode premiere effect determination table, more random numbers are associated with “premier effect is present” than in the normal mode premier effect determination table. For this reason, when the premier mode is set, the appearance rate of the premier effect is improved as compared with the case where the premier mode is not set.

(One-shot notification mode)
When an operation for setting the single notification mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the following processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub control board 90 stores a normal mode single notification determination table and a single notification mode single notification determination table. These single notification determination tables determine whether or not to execute a single notification when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed in the low probability low base state is “big hit”. In each table, a random number value is associated with each of “with one notification” and “without one notification”. Further, in the single notification determination table for the single notification mode, more random numbers are associated with “one notification is present” than in the single notification determination table for the normal mode.

  When the variation control command 91 is received from the main control board 80 when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state, the production control microcomputer 91 is included in the variation start command. It is determined whether or not the current determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit” based on the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. Here, when it is determined that it is a “hit”, processing for determining whether or not to execute one notification is performed.

  Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command related to “big hit” with respect to one announcement execution determination random number that is updated as appropriate every time random number update processing is performed on the sub-control board 90. Get the value as a random decision to execute one notification. In general, based on whether or not the obtained single notification execution determination random number matches the random number value associated with “with single notification” in the normal mode single notification determination table. Decide whether to perform the announcement.

  On the other hand, when an operation for setting the one notification mode is performed on the effect customization screen and the one notification mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the acquired one notification execution determination random number. Then, whether or not to perform one notification is determined based on whether or not the one notification notification table for one notification mode matches the random number value associated with “with one notification”.

  As described above, in the one-announcement notification determination table for the one-announcement notification mode, more random numbers are associated with “one-announcement is present” than the single-announcement notification determination table for the normal mode. For this reason, when the single notification mode is set, the appearance rate of the single notification is improved as compared with the case where the single notification mode is not set.

(Prefetch reduction mode)
When an operation for setting the prefetch reduction mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the following processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a normal mode prefetch effect determination table and a prefetch reduction mode prefetch effect determination table. These pre-reading effect determination tables are tables that are referred to when determining whether or not to execute a so-called pre-reading effect based on the result of the prior determination described in the first embodiment. ”And“ no prefetch effect ”are associated with random values. Also, in the prefetch reduction mode prefetch effect determination table, a smaller random number than the normal mode prefetch effect determination table is associated with “with prefetch effect”.

  When the game control is performed in the low probability and low base state, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a special figure 1 start entry command from the main control board 80 and is included in the special figure 1 start entry command. Based on the prior determination information, it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect can be executed. Specifically, for example, when the corresponding first special symbol success / failure determination is executed based on the prior determination information, whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol whose variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time is selected. Whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined based on the above. Here, when it is determined that the prefetch effect can be executed, a process for determining whether or not to actually execute the prefetch effect is performed.

  Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 is a priori based on which it is determined that the prefetch effect can be executed with respect to the prefetch effect execution determination random number that is appropriately updated every time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90. The value of the timing at which the special figure 1 start entering command including the determination information is received is acquired as a pre-reading effect execution determination random number. Then, usually, the prefetch effect is determined based on whether or not the acquired prefetch effect execution determination random number matches the random value associated with “prefetch effect is present” in the normal mode prefetch effect determination table. Determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, when an operation for setting the prefetch reduction mode is performed on the effect customization screen and the prefetch reduction mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the acquired prefetch effect execution determination random number is the prefetch reduction. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is determined based on whether or not it matches the random number value associated with “with pre-reading effect” in the mode pre-reading effect determination table.

  As described above, in the prefetch reduction mode prefetch effect determination table, a smaller random number value is associated with “prefetch effect is present” than in the normal mode prefetch effect determination table. For this reason, when the pre-reading reduction mode is set, the appearance rate of the pre-reading effect is lowered as compared with the case where the pre-reading reduction mode is not set.

(Auto button)
When an operation for enabling the auto button is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the following processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. At the start of the game effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b) is valid during the game effect. On the other hand, when the effective period is started, the image control microcomputer 101 performs a button image simulating the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b) and an operation for prompting an operation of “press!”, For example. An operation promotion effect for displaying the promotion character and the effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period on the first display screen 7a is executed.

  When the function of the auto button is not effective, when the player operates the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b) during the effective period, an operation notification command for notifying the operation is displayed from the sub-control board 90. For example, an operation-corresponding effect that displays a predetermined effect image on the first display screen 7a is executed by being transmitted to the control board 100. On the contrary, if the operation is not performed during the effective period, such an operation corresponding effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the operation for enabling the auto button is performed on the effect customization screen and the function of the auto button is enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91, for example, during the above-described effective period, At the timing when half of the effective period has elapsed, a command for instructing execution of the operation corresponding effect is transmitted to the image control board 100. As described above, the player performs a predetermined operation for enabling the auto button on the effect customization screen, so that the operation can be performed without operating the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b). It is possible to execute the production.

(Auto button)
When an operation for validating the back button suggestion is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the following processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. For example, when the game effect is started, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a is valid during the game effect. Among the effective periods set in this way, there is a case where the above-described operation promotion effect is not executed, and the player can use the back button based on the effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a, for example. It is necessary to specify such an effective period and generate an operation-related effect by operating the first effect button 63a during the effective period.

  On the other hand, when the operation for enabling the back button suggestion is performed on the effect customization screen and the function for suggesting the back button is enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91, for example, performs the operation promotion effect described above. During the effective period without accompanying, the button lamp built in the first effect button 63a is turned on via the lamp control board 107. Thus, when the player performs a predetermined operation for enabling the back button suggestion on the effect customization screen, the button image, the operation promoting character, and the effective period gauge are not displayed during the effective period. However, it is possible to suggest (imply) to the player that the period is valid.

(High tone adjustment)
When an operation for enabling the high pitch adjustment is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C), the following processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. When the treble adjustment function is not enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs, from the speaker 67, the first game effect sound associated with the game effect, for example, via the audio control board 106.

  On the other hand, when the operation for enabling the treble adjustment is performed on the effect customization screen and the function of the treble adjustment is enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the first operation via the voice control board 106. A second game effect sound obtained by cutting the high sound range of one game effect sound is output from the speaker 67. As a result, it is possible to output a production sound that is less harsh to the player.

[Award winning command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a prize waiting command reception process executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an award-waiting command reception process executed in the sub-control board 90.

  When the game control microcomputer 81 is in a low-probability and low-base state and the variation display of the first special symbol is finished in a state where the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is determined is not held, A winning await command is sent to the sub-control board 90 for notifying that the game ball is waiting for winning at the starting port 20. As described above, when the game ball is in a state of waiting for winning a prize, the game effect that causes the effect symbol to be variably displayed in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol does not proceed. By receiving it, it is possible to specify the transition from the game effect progress state to the game effect non-progress state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 59, the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a prize waiting command transmitted from the main control board 80 has been received as described above (step S111). Here, when it is determined that a command waiting for winning is received (step S111: YES), that is, when the game effect shifts to the non-progression state, measurement of the elapsed time since the transition to the game effect non-progression state starts. (Step S112), the measuring flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to “ON” (Step S113). This in-measurement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the elapsed time since the transition to the game effect non-progression state is being measured, and is set to “ON” when the measurement of the elapsed time is started. It is set to “OFF” with the end of time.

  When the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S113 or determines that the winning command is not received (step S111: NO), whether or not the measurement flag is set to “ON”. Is determined (step S114). Here, when it is determined that the measuring flag is not set to “ON” (step S114: NO), the series of winning awaiting command reception processing ends, and the processing returns to step S111.

  When it is determined that the measuring flag is set to “ON” (step S114: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 shifts to the game effect non-progress state for the first time (in the second embodiment, It is determined whether or not (10 seconds) has elapsed (step S115). Specifically, when measurement of elapsed time is started by the process of step S112, information indicating the elapsed time (elapsed time information) is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 and updated as time passes. Therefore, based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information coincides with the first time, the effect control microcomputer 91 has passed the first time since the transition to the non-progression state of the game effect. Determine whether or not.

  When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state (step S115: YES), for example, a command instructing the display start of the non-game reset selection screen is issued. By transmitting to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 is started to display the non-game reset selection screen (step S116). Then, the adjustment / change prohibition flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to “ON” (step S117). This adjustment / change prohibition flag is a state in which the volume / light quantity adjustment with the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) displayed and the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (B)) are displayed. This is a flag that indicates whether or not the production customization change is prohibited, and is set to “ON” when the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, and the non-game reset selection screen is displayed. It is set to “OFF” upon completion.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S117 or determines that the first time has not elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state (step S115: NO). It is determined whether or not the second time (5 minutes in the present embodiment 2) has elapsed since the transition to the progress state (step S118). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM matches the second time, the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state. It is determined whether or not. Here, when it is determined that the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state (step S118: YES), the volume / light quantity is reset (step S119). Specifically, the volume information is updated so that the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 indicates “1” which is the minimum volume, and the light quantity information stored in the RAM of the image control board 100 is updated. A command for instructing execution of processing for updating light amount information is transmitted to the image control board 100 so as to indicate “5” which is the maximum light amount.

  In this way, the effect control microcomputer 91, when the setting classified as the second setting is changed from the initial setting, the game effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination in the low probability low base state When the first time elapses without ending the game effect non-progression state after transitioning to the game effect non-progression state where the game does not progress, the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started. When the second time elapses (longer than the first time) without ending the game effect non-progression state after shifting to the game effect non-progression state, the first setting (here, the setting of the light amount / volume) ) To the default settings.

[Operation handling by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the operation handling process executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts illustrating the operation corresponding process executed in the sub-control board 90. When the first effect button 63a, the second effect button 63b, or the cross key is operated, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes an operation corresponding process described below.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c, the second effect button detection switch 63d, or the key operation detection switch 63e is input. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player has been performed (step S120). Here, when it is determined that no operation is performed by the player (step S120: NO), the operation corresponding process is terminated, and the process returns to step S120.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has passed without transitioning to the non-progress state of the game effect after the transition to the non-progress state of the game effect. However, if this configuration is adopted, the following problems may occur. In other words, in this configuration, for example, a player who is playing a game is trying to adjust the volume / light quantity and customize the effect by operating the cross key or the first effect button 63a immediately after shifting to the non-advanced state of the game effect. Nevertheless, the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started after the first time has elapsed since the transition to the non-progression state of the game effect, and the volume / light quantity adjustment and effect customization cannot be performed. Problems can arise.

  Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, for example, when an operation by the player is performed between the transition to the non-progress state of the game effect and the first time has elapsed, It is conceivable to employ a configuration in which the non-game reset selection screen is not displayed by stopping the measurement of the elapsed time after shifting to the non-progression state.

However, if such a configuration is easily adopted, there is a possibility of causing another problem that various settings classified as the second setting cannot be collectively reset.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such another problem, the operation by the player before the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game effect non-progression state. Is performed, the elapsed time after transitioning to the game effect non-progression state is reset, and the elapsed time is measured again with reference to the timing at which the operation is performed. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing.

  That is, if the production control microcomputer 91 determines that an operation by the player has been performed (step S120: YES), is the measurement-in-progress flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 set to “ON”? It is determined whether or not (step S121). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time since the transition to the game effect non-progression state is being measured. If it is determined that the measuring flag is set to “ON” (step S121: YES), the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 becomes “0”. Thus, the elapsed time is reset (step S122), and the measurement of the elapsed time is started again (step S123).

  As described above, when the measurement flag is set to “ON”, the process of step S122 and the process of step S123 are performed, so that the last operation performed by the player in the non-progression state of the game effect is performed. The display of the non-game reset selection screen is started at the timing when the first time has elapsed since the start, and as a result, the above-described plurality of problems can be solved simultaneously.

  Here, when an operation by the player is performed in a non-progression state of the game effect, the display of the non-game reset selection screen is started at the timing when the first time has elapsed since the operation was performed. However, in another embodiment, for example, a third time shorter than the first time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation by the player in the non-progression state of the game effect is performed. The display of the non-game reset selection screen may be started at this timing.

  If the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S123 or determines that the measuring flag is not set to “ON” (step S121: NO), it is determined whether or not the game effect progressing state is set. Is determined (step S124). For example, if a variation stop command has not yet been received after receiving a variation start command related to the first special symbol success / failure determination from the main control board 80, it can be determined that the game effect progressing state. In addition, if a fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the variable stop command is received (a special symbol is stopped and displayed), it can be determined that the game effect progressing state is reached.

  When it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 91 is in the game effect progress state (step S124: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the operation promotion effect is valid (step S125). When the operation promotion effect is executed during the game effect including the variation display of the effect symbol, information indicating the valid period related to the operation promotion effect is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For this reason, when the operation promotion effect is executed, the operation promotion effect is in an effective period based on the elapsed time from the start of the game effect and the information indicating the effective period stored in the RAM. It can be determined whether or not. In addition, when the information which shows the effective period which concerns on an operation promotion effect is not memorize | stored in RAM of the sub control board 90, it determines with not being in the effective period of an operation promotion effect in said step S125.

  When it is determined that the operation promotion effect is valid (step S125: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the effect button has been operated (step S126). Specifically, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is executed, the first effect button 63a is based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed. On the other hand, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b is executed, has the second effect button 63b been operated based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the second effect button detection switch 63d? Determine whether or not.

  When it is determined that the effect button has been operated (step S126: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes an operation corresponding effect (step S127). For example, when the first effect button 63a is operated during the operation promotion effect that is performed before the reach of the effect symbol is established, an effect image representing a state in which a predetermined character emits a dialogue is displayed on the first display screen 7a. A command for instructing execution of an operation-related effect called a speech advance notice is transmitted to the image control board 100. Further, for example, when an operation promotion effect that prompts an operation of the second effect button 63b is executed at the end of the high-reliability reach effect, and the second effect button 63b is operated during the effective period of the operation promotion effect, the game effect The movable decorative member 14 is operated on the condition that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the operation is “big hit”, and the LED, the panel lamp 5, the frame incorporated in the movable decorative member 14 A command for instructing execution of the effect of causing the lamp 66 to emit light in rainbow is transmitted to the lamp control board 107.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation promotion effect is not valid (step S125: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the left key or the right key of the cross key is operated (step S128). . Here, since it is determined as “YES” in step S124, the customization acceptance screen (see FIG. 55A), the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55B), and the effect customization screen (FIG. 55C). )) Or a game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55 (D)) is displayed on the third display screen 72a, and these are displayed according to the player's operation of the left key or right key of the cross key. It is necessary to switch the screen. In order to realize such a screen switching process, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following process.

  In other words, when it is determined that the left key or the right key of the cross key is operated (step S128: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes a switching process (step S129). Specifically, for example, when an operation of the right key is detected during display of the customization acceptance screen, a command instructing execution of processing for switching the customization acceptance screen to the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is transmitted to the image control board 100 . For example, when an operation of the left key is detected during display of the effect customization screen, a command for instructing execution of processing for switching the effect customization screen to the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is transmitted to the image control board 100. For example, when an operation of the right key is detected during display of the effect customization screen, a command instructing execution of processing for switching the effect customization screen to the game reset selection screen is transmitted to the image control board 100.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 91 is not in the game effect progress state (step S124: NO), that is, in the game effect non-progress state in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub control board 90 It is determined whether or not the adjustment / change prohibition flag stored in the RAM is set to “ON” (step S130). This adjustment / change prohibition flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when the display of the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is started (see steps S116 and 117 in FIG. 59). When the selection screen is not displayed, “OFF” is set.

  If the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the adjustment / change prohibition flag is not set to "ON" (step S130: NO), that is, if the non-game reset selection screen is not displayed, the third display Since the various screens displayed on the screen 72a can be switched, the process of step S128 is executed in the same manner as in the case where “NO” is determined in the process of step S125.

  On the other hand, when the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to “ON”, the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is being displayed, and depending on the operation of the up key or the down key of the cross key, It is necessary to move the cursor between the selection item “Yes” and the selection item “No”. For this reason, when it is determined that the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S130: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes processing of step S132 described later.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the left key or the right key of the cross key is not operated (step S128: NO), or determines that the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to “ON”. In this case (step S130: YES), based on whether a detection signal notifying that the up key or down key of the cross key has been operated is input from the key operation detection switch 63e, the up key or down key of the cross key. It is determined whether or not has been operated (step S132). If it is determined that the up key or down key of the cross key has not been operated (step S132: NO), the process proceeds to step S137 (see FIG. 61) described later.

  During the display of the customization acceptance screen (see FIG. 55A), the screen is switched by the player operating the left key or the right key of the cross key. On the other hand, the up and down keys of the cross key do not function while the customization acceptance screen is displayed. Therefore, when the customization acceptance screen is being displayed, “YES” is not determined in the process of step S132, but “NO” is determined in the process of step S132, and the process proceeds to step S137.

  When it is determined that the up key or the down key of the cross key is operated (step S132: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 100 has a customization acceptance screen (see FIG. 55A), a volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55B), and an effect customization screen (see FIG. 55C). And screen information indicating which screen of the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55D) is displayed on the third display screen 72a. In step S133, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is being displayed based on whether the screen indicated by the screen information stored in the RAM is a volume / light quantity adjustment screen. Determine.

  By the way, in the volume / light quantity adjustment screen, the effect customization screen, and the in-game reset selection screen illustrated in FIGS. Only the volume / light quantity adjustment screen needs to be executed, and for the other two screens, it is necessary to execute cursor movement processing for moving the cursor in accordance with the operation of the up key or the down key of the cross key . Therefore, when it is determined that the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes an increase / decrease process (step S134). Specifically, when the display object including the characters “volume” is highlighted on the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55A), the effect control microcomputer 91 responds to the operation of the up key. A command for instructing execution of a process for increasing the display object to be highlighted by one among the five display objects constituting the volume image is transmitted to the image control board 100, and the volume image is displayed according to the operation of the down key. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of the process of reducing one display object to be highlighted among the five display objects constituting the image. In addition, when the display object including the characters “light quantity” is highlighted on the volume / light quantity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55A), the effect control microcomputer 91 responds to the operation of the up key. A command for instructing execution of processing for increasing the number of display objects to be highlighted by one among the five display objects constituting the image is transmitted to the image control board 100, and a light amount image is constructed in accordance with the operation of the down key. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of a process of reducing one display object highlighted among the five display objects.

  On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S133: NO), that is, the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55B) or the game reset selection screen ( When the display shown in FIG. 55C is being performed, a command for instructing execution of the process of moving the cursor is transmitted to the image control board 100 as described above with reference to FIGS. 55B to 55C.

  When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the upper key or the lower key of the cross key is not operated (step S132: NO), the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is being displayed as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S137). The determination process in step S137 is performed in the same manner as the process in step S133 described above.

  When it is determined that the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is being displayed (step S137: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the process of step S120 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c. Then, it is determined whether or not the operation determined that the operation by the player has been performed is the operation of the first effect button 63a (step S138). If it is determined that the operation is an operation of the first effect button 63a (step S138: YES), a volume / light quantity setting process is executed (step S139). Specifically, when volume increase / decrease processing is executed in the process of step S134, the volume information is updated so that the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 indicates the volume after the increase / decrease process. . Further, when the increase / decrease process related to the light amount is executed in the process of step S134, the light amount information stored in the RAM of the image control board 100 is specified by the notified information, including information notifying the light amount after the increase / decrease process. A command for instructing execution of a process of updating so as to indicate the amount of light to be transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 executes the processing of step S139, determines that the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S137: NO), or the player's operation is the first effect button 63a. If it is determined that the operation is not an operation (step S138: NO), it is determined based on the screen information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 100 whether or not the effect customization screen is being displayed (step S140). .

  When it is determined that the effect customization screen is being displayed (step S1410: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes customization processing (step S141). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 90 stores customization information indicating the contents of various settings classified as the second setting, and the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the effect customization screen. Update the customization information to reflect the setting changes of each setting. Then, a customized content notification pattern is set (step S142). Specifically, with respect to various settings displayed on the effect customization screen, the number of settings that have been changed to “ON” is specified based on the customization information, and the effect that the customization number notification image (see FIG. 56) notifies. The information indicating the determination result is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as setting information for custom content notification. In addition, the contents of the settings that have been changed to “ON” for various settings displayed on the effect customization screen are specified based on the customization information, and the order in which the specified settings are displayed is determined. Information indicating the determination result is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as setting information for custom content notification.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S142, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes the two pieces of setting information stored in the RAM in the processing in step S142, and the customized content notification (customized number notification image and customized information described above based on FIG. 56). A customized content notification command for instructing execution of the display of the content notification image is transmitted to the image control board 100 (step S143). Thereby, as described above with reference to FIG. 56, a customized number notification image indicating the number of settings that are different from the initial settings among the various settings classified as the second settings is displayed. The customized content notification image is displayed so as to sequentially show the content of the settings that are different from the initial settings. In FIG. 56, since the premier mode, the prefetch reduction mode, and the back button suggestion are all set to “ON”, the characters indicated by the customized content notification image are “premier mode”, “prefetch reduction mode”, “ The state of switching in the order of "back button suggestion" is illustrated.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the effect customization screen is not being displayed (step S140: NO), that is, a game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55D) or a non-game reset selection screen (FIG. 55). 57 ”is being displayed, it is determined whether or not“ Yes ”has been selected (step S144). Specifically, based on whether or not a detection signal for notifying that the first effect button 63a has been operated is input from the first effect button detection switch 63c in a state where the cursor is positioned on the selection item “Yes”. It is then determined whether or not “Yes” has been selected. Here, when it is determined that “Yes” is not selected (step S144: NO), a series of operation corresponding processing ends, and the processing returns to step S120.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that “Yes” is selected (step S144: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 executes customization initialization processing (step S145). Specifically, the customization information stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 is information indicating that all the settings classified as the second setting are set to “OFF” (initial setting). Update the customization information.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is stored in, for example, the RAM of the sub-control board 100 when the process of step S145 is executed or when it is determined that “Yes” is not selected (step S144: NO). Based on whether or not the adjustment / change prohibition flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not the non-game reset selection screen is being displayed (step S146). If it is determined that the non-game reset selection screen is being displayed (step S146: YES), the display of the non-game reset selection screen is ended on the image control board 100 (step S147), and adjustment / change prohibited The flag is set to “OFF” (step S148). Then, after the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the elapsed time is reset (step S149) in the same manner as in steps S122 and 123 in order to display the non-game reset selection screen again as necessary. ), The measurement of elapsed time is started (step S150).

  Here, based on FIGS. 59 to 61, the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 to realize the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described, but in other embodiments, this effect A part of the processing executed by the control microcomputer 91 may be executed on the image control board 100.

  Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. Here, FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of effects executed with the variation display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment. The flow of this effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, the description of the configuration and processing common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first and second embodiments is omitted, and the configuration different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first and second embodiments is mainly described. The processing will be described.

  In the low probability low base state, when the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed in response to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 20, the first special symbol display 41a displays the first special symbol in a variable manner. The first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the effect symbol (in this embodiment, the variation display of the three symbol rows) is started (FIG. 62). (See (A)). Specifically, for example, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode which is one of a plurality of effect modes (see FIG. 64), in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), “1 Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect symbols in which the numbers “9” to “9” are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top is displayed. (For example, see FIG. 66 (A)). Then, as the first special symbol variation display starts, the scroll display of the three symbol sequences is started so that these symbol sequences scroll from top to bottom (for example, FIG. 66 (B )reference).

  Immediately after the variable display of each symbol sequence is started, or immediately after the so-called pseudo-continuous performance is executed, each symbol sequence is scrolled at high speed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize (identify) the rendered symbols. In each screen diagram such as FIG. 66 (B), in order to express such a state, a state in which each symbol row is scrolled at high speed is indicated by a broken line with an arrow indicating a scroll direction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the display mode and the variation mode of the production symbol are different depending on the production mode of the variation production (production including the variation display of the production symbol) performed on the first display screen 7a. It has characteristics. The display mode and variation mode of the effect symbol for each effect mode will be described in detail later.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 62, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is “losing” and it is determined not to execute the reach effect, That is, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol for which the reach effect is not executed is selected, the three special effects indicating the breaks (for example, “294”) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol, As the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as one special symbol, a losing notification effect for stopping these three effect symbols is performed (see FIG. 62B). Here, the “pseudo stop” means that the effect symbol displayed at the predetermined position is swung on the spot without substantially moving, and in the following explanation, the actual stop that stops the effect symbol completely (simply simply In some cases, it may be called “pseudo stop”.

  So far, the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing” and the variation effect when the reach effect is not executed has been described. However, the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”. If it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed even if it is “losing”, that is, if the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the reach effect is executed is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the middle, for example, the left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), and the right symbol row is moved so that the right symbol common to the left symbol moves to the effective line. A pre-reach effect that scrolls at a low speed is performed (see FIG. 62C). In addition, the pre-reach effect is not limited to this, and after the display of the effect symbol variation is started, first the right symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line, and then the left symbol common to the right symbol is on the active line. The left symbol and the right symbol (same as the left symbol) are pseudo-stopped simultaneously on the active line after the effect of scrolling the symbol pattern of the left column at low speed so that it moves to the left and the variable symbol display are started. As described above, an effect of moving these symbols toward the effective line may be executed as a pre-reach effect.

  As a result of these pre-reach effects, reach is established when the common left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line (see FIG. 62D). In this way, when the effect symbol common to the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is established, the effect symbol common to these effect symbols (reach symbol) is stopped on the active line in the middle row. Reach production is expected to be expected. In the third embodiment, as a reach effect that can be executed in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state, as illustrated in FIG. 62, normal short reach, normal long reach, first SP reach, Five types of reach production are prepared, the second SP reach and the SPSP reach.

  The normal short reach (see FIG. 62E) is a reach effect having the lowest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 2%). This normal short reach is a reach effect in which the effect execution time is shorter than the normal long reach described later, and when the reach is established, the normal short reach is usually performed. When this normal short reach is performed, when the reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row gradually decreases, and the middle symbol or reach symbol which is the same as the reach symbol between the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. Scroll display of the middle symbol row for pseudo-stopping the middle symbols different from (for example, see FIG. 63B).

  Here, when the variation production pattern for notifying the winning in the normal short reach is set, the winning informing effect (winning notification effect or lose notification effect) is performed in the final stage of the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (F)). . Specifically, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination of this time is “big hit”, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line (for example, “222”) After the effect symbols indicating quasi-stop are given, a hit notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination of this time is “losing”, a reach-losing eye (for example, “232”) is indicated by pseudo-stopping the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the effective line. After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, a loss notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are.

  On the other hand, when a variation production pattern that develops from a normal short reach to another reach production is set, in other words, a variation time (first special) that can execute a pre-reach production, a normal short reach, and another reach production. When the variation pattern is selected, the following effects are performed. For example, when a variation effect pattern is set in which normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) is changed to normal long reach (see FIG. 62 (G)) and a winning effect is set in normal long reach, the normal short reach is set. At the end of the reach, a predetermined development suggestion effect suggesting the development to the normal long reach is performed, and the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row is resumed, and the reach effect is developed to the normal long reach. In the normal long reach, for example, an effect display is performed in which a predetermined character expects a uniform pattern in the center area of the first display screen 7a. FIG. 63 (C) illustrates a state in which normal long reach is being performed, but illustration of an effect display that expects symbol matching is omitted.

  The normal long reach is the reach production with the next highest hit reliability after the normal short reach among the above five types of reach production (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 4%). In most cases, the normal long reach is the normal long reach. Will not be developed into other reach productions, and the loss notification production will be performed in the normal long reach (see FIG. 62 (F)). If the result of the first special symbol success / failure judgment is a big hit, the normal long reach will be performed. The hit notification effect (see FIG. 62 (F)) may be performed. Further, when a variation production pattern that develops from normal long reach to another reach production (first SP reach or SPSP reach in the third embodiment) is set, the normal long reach to the first SP reach (FIG. 62 ( H))) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)), the reach effect is developed.

  Here, the first SP reach is a reach production with the next highest jackpot reliability after the normal long reach (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 11%). When developing from the normal long reach to the first SP reach, the following is performed. Production is performed. That is, at the end of normal long reach, the middle symbol row scrolls at a low speed, and after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol passes over the active line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row resumes, The reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped are moved to the upper left region and upper right region of the first display screen 7a while being reduced while maintaining the reach state (FIG. 63D). )reference). Then, the first SP reach effect image is displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the normal short reach (see FIG. 62 (E)) is developed to the first SP reach (see FIG. 62 (H)) without going through the normal long reach. In addition, the normal short reach does not pass through the normal long reach and directly develops to the second SP reach (see FIG. 62 (I)), or the normal short reach does not pass through the normal long reach and the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (1)). There is a case where it develops directly in (see K).

  Here, the second SP reach is a reach production having a slightly higher jackpot reliability than the first SP reach (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 12%). When developing from the normal short reach to the second SP reach, the following is performed. Production is performed. That is, at the end of normal long reach, the middle symbol row scrolls at a low speed, and after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol passes over the active line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row resumes, The reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped are moved to the upper left region and upper right region of the first display screen 7a while being reduced while maintaining the reach state (FIG. 63E). )reference). And a 2nd SP reach | attainment effect image is displayed on the center area | region of the 1st display screen 7a, and the predetermined effect display which expects a big hit is performed.

  By the way, although the 1st SP reach and the 2nd SP reach perform the effect display which expects a big hit with the same screen composition, these reach effects differ mutually. Specifically, in the first SP reach, an effect display is performed in which the player wins a bonus if the player's character prevents the attack of the enemy character, and conversely, if the player's character cannot prevent the attack of the enemy character, the game is lost. On the other hand, the second SP reach is configured as a mission effect, and when the player's own character succeeds in the mission, a jackpot is displayed.

  When the first SP reach and the second SP reach are developed, since the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is relatively low, the lost notification effect is the hit notification effect in the winning notification effect (see FIG. 62 (J)). Easier to implement. For this reason, when developing to the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player expects to develop from these SP reach to the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)).

  Here, the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)) is the reach effect having the highest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects. In the third embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 62, when directly developing to SPSP reach immediately after the reach is established (see FIGS. 62D and 62K), normal short reach and normal long reach are performed. To SPSP reach via (see FIGS. 62 (E), (G), and (K)) and to SPSP reach via normal short reach and first SP reach (FIG. 62 (E ), (H), and (K)), and the case of developing to SPSP reach via the normal short reach and the second SP reach (see FIGS. 62E, 62I, and K). There is a case where the normal short reach is directly developed to the SPSP reach (see FIGS. 62E and 62K).

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in SPSP reach, an SPSP reach effect image is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 63F), and a battle effect in which the player character and the enemy character battle is executed. However, if the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”, a victory effect and a win notification effect are performed in which the player character wins the enemy character, and if the player character is lost, Defeat production and loss notification production to defeat the character are executed.

[About screen structure]
FIG. 63 is a screen diagram illustrating a screen configuration of the first display screen 7a in the low probability and low base state. In the low probability low base state, as illustrated in FIG. 63A, a hold icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e are formed on the first display screen 7a below the effect symbol display area 73. The

<Hold icon display area 9c>
The hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63A) is a display area in which a hold icon (hold display image) indicating that the first special symbol success / failure determination is held is displayed. This is a display area corresponding to the first presentation hold display area 9c. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, when a game ball wins at the first starting port 20 in a situation where the special symbol winning determination and the special symbol variation display cannot be started immediately such as during the special symbol variation display or the big hit game. In this case, the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four).

  As described above, when the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is determined is reserved, the same number of reservations as the number of reservations for determining whether or not the first special symbol is determined is displayed in the reservation icon display area 9c. An icon is displayed. FIG. 63A illustrates a state in which one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c in order to suggest that the number of holds in the first special symbol success / failure determination is “1”. Yes.

  By the way, if the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c during execution of the highly reliable reach effect such as the SPSP reach described above (see FIG. 62K), the display area used for the reach effect is limited. In addition, the display of the hold icon may reduce the interest of reach production. For example, when a hold icon (for example, a red hold icon) with a display mode that suggests that the jackpot reliability is relatively high by a so-called hold pre-reading effect is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the player's consciousness is increased. It is easy to be directed to the hold icon, and there is a possibility that the production effect of the reach production being executed is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, during the pre-reach effect described above based on FIG. 62C or during the normal short reach described above based on FIG. While the display object (the pedestal of the hold icon in the third embodiment) and the hold icon that constitute 9c and the hold icon are displayed (see FIGS. 63 (A) and (B)), the reach effect having a higher jackpot reliability than the normal long reach During the execution, a configuration is adopted in which the display object and the hold icon constituting the hold icon display area 9c are not displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 63C to 63F).

<The icon display area 9e>
The icon display area 9e is a display area for displaying "the icon" as a change suggestion image that suggests that the first special symbol is changing. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (see, for example, FIG. 63A), for example, at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. It is erased from the icon display area 9e. However, the erasing timing of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased while the first special symbol is being displayed. For example, the icon may be displayed during SPSP reach development or during SPSP reach. It may be erased.

  By the way, when the game ball is won at the first start opening 20 in a state where the special symbol variation display is not performed and the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is held, the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. On the other hand, when the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is finished in a state where the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (the hold icon displayed at the position closest to the icon display area 9e) is executed. As the first special symbol variation display starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display region 9c to the icon display region 9e. Will be displayed as a new icon. Thus, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 9e is displayed larger than when it is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63A). For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e rather than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c.

  When another hold icon different from the earliest hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the hold icon display area 9c is moved with the shift of the earliest hold icon to the icon display area 9e. The other hold icons are shifted in a direction approaching the icon display area 9e. As is clear from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c may be displayed in the icon display area 9e. Therefore, in the following description, when the reserved icon and the icon are not distinguished from each other, they may be collectively referred to simply as “icon”.

(Screen configuration at the start of change)
When the first special symbol success / failure determination held in the low probability low base state is executed, the first special symbol variation display is started, and icon shift processing is performed accordingly. Specifically, for example, when the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed in a state where the two rights of the first special symbol success / failure determination are reserved, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (A). The first hold icon of the two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the second hold icon is shifted to the hold icon display area 9c. A shift process for shifting to the display position where the first hold icon is displayed is performed. In addition, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, high-speed scrolling of the three symbol sequences is started (see FIG. 63A).

  Immediately after the high-speed scrolling of these three symbol sequences is started, a part of each of the three symbol sequences is displayed on the first display screen 7a in the effect symbol display area 7b. A predetermined background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a so that a part of the design symbols is superimposed (see FIG. 63A). For example, when the effect is controlled in a fourth normal mode, which will be described later, a background image dedicated to the fourth normal mode (selected music effect image: see FIG. 65) is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. The effect mode name “fourth normal mode” corresponding to is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. During high-speed scrolling of the three symbol sequences, the effect symbols constituting the three symbol sequences are displayed in a translucent manner, so that the player responds to the effect mode through the effect symbols constituting the three symbol sequences. It is possible to visually recognize the background image.

  In FIG. 63A, the fourth normal mode dedicated background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the effect mode name “fourth normal mode” is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Although the displayed state is illustrated, when the production is controlled in the first normal mode, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a and “first normal mode” is displayed. The effect mode name “mode” is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65, 68, and 69). When the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the second normal mode dedicated background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the effect mode name “second normal mode” is the first. It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 70). When the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the third normal mode dedicated background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the effect mode name “third normal mode” is the first. It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 71 to 73).

(Screen configuration during normal short reach)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63, after the high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows is started, the scrolling speed of each symbol row gradually decreases, and the effect symbols common to the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and reached. May be established and may develop into a normal short reach (see FIG. 62E). As described above, when the normal short reach is developed, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a before the reach is established is continuously displayed. With this background image displayed, the normal short reach is displayed. The predetermined effect display is performed (see FIG. 63B).

  In the third embodiment, a case where the background image displayed during normal short reach is displayed continuously until the end of normal short reach will be described as an example, but from normal short reach to other reach effects. In the case of development, the background image may be changed to another effect image during the normal short reach. For example, when reach production develops from normal short reach to normal long reach (see FIG. 62 (G)), the background image is changed to a long suggestion image that suggests normal long reach in the middle of normal short reach, When the reach production develops from the normal short reach to the first SP reach (see FIG. 62H), the background image is changed to the first SP suggestion image that suggests the first SP reach in the middle of the normal short reach. When reach production develops from the short reach to the second SP reach (see FIG. 62I), the background image is changed to the second SP suggestion image that suggests the second SP reach during the normal short reach. As an example.

(Screen configuration during normal long reach)
On the other hand, during the normal long reach developed from the normal short reach, as shown in FIG. 63C, the reach symbols (for example, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) are on the effective line in the effect symbol display area 7b. A predetermined normal long reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a in a pseudo-stopped state. Thereby, during normal long reach, an effect display is performed in which a predetermined character expects a uniform pattern in the center area of the first display screen 7a.

  In the third embodiment, during the normal short reach, the background image displayed before the reach is established (during pre-reach production) is continuously displayed, but the jackpot reliability is higher than the normal short reach. During the reach effect, a dedicated reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. In this way, when a dedicated reach effect image is displayed for each reach effect, when a hold icon that is not directly related to the current change effect or a display object that constitutes the hold icon display area 9c is displayed, the reach effect image is displayed. , And as a result, the interest of each reach production may be reduced. For this reason, in the third embodiment, during the normal long reach, during the first SP reach, during the second SP reach, and during the SPSP reach, a display object (here, each hold icon of the hold icon display area 9c). (Pedestal) is not displayed (see FIGS. 63C to 63F).

(Screen configuration during the first SP reach)
Subsequently, during the first SP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (D), the left symbol constituting the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbol is displayed. A predetermined first SP reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a in a state in which the right symbol to be configured is displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during 2nd SP reach)
Further, during the second SP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (E), the left symbol constituting the reach symbol is displayed in a small false stop in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbol is constituted. The predetermined second SP reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a in a state where the right symbol to be displayed is displayed in a small pseudo-stopped manner in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during SPSP reach)
Further, during the SPSP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (F), the left symbol constituting the reach symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stopped manner in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbol is constituted. A predetermined SPSP reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a in a state in which the right symbol is displayed as a small pseudo-stop display in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Regarding the composition of production design)
Although not shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, the effect is controlled in any one of the first normal mode to the third normal mode except when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode. ) Is a character image representing a predetermined person with respect to identification information (in the present embodiment, a number) for identifying the effect symbol from other effect symbols, in the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b. Is added (see FIGS. 66 to 73). In the present embodiment, the case where the identification information is a number will be described as an example. However, the identification information is not limited to a number as long as it is information that can distinguish the effect symbol from other effect symbols. Or a symbol.

  On the other hand, if a character image is added to the reach symbol that is displayed small in the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, the visibility of the small reach symbol is reduced, or each reach effect is displayed. There is a possibility of degrading it instead of interest. For this reason, in the third embodiment, when the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are displayed in a small false stop in the upper left area and upper right area of the first display screen 7a, the reach to which no character image is added is displayed. The symbol is to be displayed.

[Changes in production mode]
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for describing various effect modes in the low-probability / low-base state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the fluctuating effect is performed using the first display screen 7a, the speaker 67, the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the like in accordance with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. As the normal production mode (normal production mode), four types of normal production modes of the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode are prepared (see FIG. 64). .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 counts the number of times of change, which is the number of times the first special symbol and effect symbol change display (symbol change) is performed in one normal effect mode. When the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 15 times), one normal effect mode is changed to another normal effect mode. For example, when the number of symbol fluctuations performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the first normal mode changes to the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. In addition, for example, when the number of symbol fluctuations performed in the second normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the second normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. In addition, for example, when the number of symbol fluctuations performed in the third normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the third normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. In addition, for example, when the number of symbol fluctuations performed in the fourth normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the fourth normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the third normal mode.

  The normal production mode of the transfer destination is determined by, for example, production lottery by the production control microcomputer 91. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 includes a first normal mode / transition destination selection table that is referred to when selecting a normal performance mode as a transition destination in the first normal mode, and a normal performance as a transition destination in the second normal mode. Second normal mode / transition destination selection table referred to when selecting a mode and third normal mode / transition destination selection table referred to when selecting a normal performance mode as a transition destination of the third normal mode And a fourth normal mode / transition destination selection table that is referred to when selecting the normal presentation mode as the transition destination of the fourth normal mode. In these transition destination selection tables, different random values are associated with the three normal performance modes that can be transition destinations.

  For example, when selecting the normal presentation mode that is the transition destination of the first normal mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 executes the following process. That is, the production control microcomputer 91 determines the number of fluctuations regarding the transfer destination selected random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process in the sub-control board 90 when the number of fluctuations of the symbol fluctuation performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number. The random number value when the number reaches the predetermined number is acquired as a transfer destination selection random number. On the other hand, in the first normal mode / transition destination selection table, different random numbers are associated with the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the third normal mode, respectively. The microcomputer 91 reads the one normal effect mode associated with the random number value that matches the acquired transfer destination selection random number from the first normal mode / transfer destination selection table, so that the normal effect mode that becomes the transfer destination Select.

  Although the combination of the normal performance modes defined in the transition destination selection table is different from the random value associated with each normal performance mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode is selected. Even when shifting to another normal performance mode, it is possible to select a normal performance mode as a transition destination by performing the same processing.

  By the way, when the loss notification effect is executed in the reach effect with relatively high jackpot reliability such as the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach, the player dislikes that the hit notification effect is not executed. Cannot be switched well, and as a result, the game may be stopped.

  In order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed in the first SP reach, the second SP reach, or the SPSP reach, the number of fluctuations is predetermined. Regardless of whether the number of times has been reached or not, the normal production mode immediately before the development of these reach productions is changed to another normal production mode from the design fluctuation following the design fluctuation in which these reach productions were executed. It is said. For example, while the first special symbol and the production symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, the production is performed in the second normal mode during the production before reaching or during the normal short reach, and the second SP reach developed from the normal short reach loses. When the notification effect is executed, the effect lottery using the above-described transfer destination selection random number and the second normal mode / transfer destination selection table is executed, and based on the result of the effect lottery, the normal effect that becomes the transfer destination Select a mode. Then, the second normal mode is changed to the normal effect mode selected by the effect lottery with the start of the symbol variation next to the symbol variation in which the loss notification effect is executed in the second SP reach.

  In this way, when the loss notification effect is executed in a reach effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability, by changing the normal effect mode to another normal effect mode, the hit notification effect is compared with a normal short reach or the like. Urges the player to switch their feelings unfortunately without performing the hit notification effect in spite of the execution of the first SP reach, the second SP reach, or the SPSP reach. It is possible to contribute to a reduction in discomfort.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, that is, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination in the low probability low base state is “big hit”, However, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a relatively long variation time is selected, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the selected variation pattern, the above four types of normal symbols are displayed. There is a case where any one of the effect modes is shifted to another effect mode. That is, one of the normal performance modes shifts to a chance mode that is a performance mode having a higher jackpot reliability than the normal performance mode, or shifts to a fierce mode that has a higher jackpot reliability than the chance mode, or In some cases, the mode is changed to the super hot mode via the chance mode.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, when the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is held is held, it is determined in advance whether or not it is a big hit before the first special symbol is determined. The game control microcomputer 81 may execute a pre-determination process that specifies a variation pattern of the first special symbol that is selected when the first special symbol success / failure determination is actually executed. Based on the result of the prior determination, the normal effect mode shifts to the chance mode, or the normal effect mode shifts to the intense hot mode before the first special symbol validity determination subject to the prior determination process is executed. There are also cases where the normal performance mode shifts to the intense hot mode via the chance mode. In addition, the normal effect mode is shifted to the chance mode before the first special symbol success / failure determination that is the target of the prior determination process is executed, and the first special symbol determination performed in response to the first special symbol success / failure determination being executed. The chance mode may change to the super hot mode while the special symbol is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the normal performance mode may shift to the chance mode or the intense game mode. Can be improved, and a high performance effect can be obtained.

  However, in the mode transition effect as described above, the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, and the variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In some cases, it is difficult to execute. For this reason, if a player cannot easily win a big hit and a period in which only the variation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively short variation time is selected continues for a long time, a highly reliable reach effect is not executed. In conjunction with this, it is possible that the interest will gradually decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, by changing the effect mode between the normal effect modes, the background image on which the effect symbol is superimposed is changed, the display mode of the effect symbol is changed, Synthetic effects that change the pattern's change mode, provide a serif effect using a similar image that is similar to the character image that makes up the effect pattern, or combine the numbers and the character image to form the effect pattern By doing this, the above-described decline in interest is suppressed.

[Features of each normal performance mode]
Next, the characteristics of each normal performance mode will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 65 is a list illustrating characteristics of each normal performance mode. As described above with reference to FIG. 64, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the first normal mode is used as the normal effect mode related to the effect performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. The second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode are prepared.

<Music selection>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, a music selection screen described later is displayed, and the player performs the first operation by performing a predetermined operation on the music selection screen. It is possible to arbitrarily select music to be played using the display screen 7a, the speaker 67, etc. (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, in the three normal performance modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode, the music selection screen is not selected, and the player cannot arbitrarily select music (see FIG. 65). ).

<Background image>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the first normal mode dedicated background image that is not displayed in the other normal effect modes is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the second When the effect is controlled in the normal mode, the second normal mode dedicated background image that is not displayed in the other normal effect modes is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, A background image dedicated to the third normal mode that is not displayed in other normal effect modes is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

  On the other hand, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, unlike in the case where the effect is controlled in the other normal effect mode, to select one of a plurality of pieces of music that can be played by the pachinko gaming machine 1 The music selection screen is displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 1), and the player uses the cross key described in the second embodiment and the first effect button 63a (see FIG. 1) to perform a predetermined process. Any music can be selected by performing the operation. When an effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, if any song is selected by a predetermined operation, a selected song effect image (moving image of the selected song) that is an effect image related to the selected song is the first. It is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 65).

  When no music is selected by the player, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects one of the reproducible music by effect lottery, and a music effect image (movie of music) that is an effect image related to the selected music. ) On the first display screen 7a via the image control board 100. When the display of the music effect image selected by the effect lottery ends, if the player does not select the music effect, the effect lottery is executed again, and the music effect image related to the newly selected music is displayed. Is displayed on the first display screen 7a. In addition, on the music selection screen, it is possible to select random playback separately from any of the plurality of music, and when the player selects this random playback, the music effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a is displayed. It will change automatically.

<BGM>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the presentation is controlled in the first normal mode, the first normal mode dedicated BGM corresponding to the first normal mode dedicated background image is output from the speaker 67, and the second normal mode is output. When the effect is controlled in the mode, the second normal mode dedicated BGM corresponding to the second normal mode dedicated background image is output from the speaker 67, and when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the third normal mode The third normal mode dedicated BGM corresponding to the dedicated background image is output from the speaker 67.

  On the other hand, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music effect image related to the selected music selected by the player or the music effect image related to the music automatically selected by the effect lottery is displayed. It is displayed on the first display screen 7a. For this reason, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music selected arbitrarily or automatically corresponding to the music effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a is the fourth normal mode. It is output from the speaker 67 as a dedicated BGM (see FIG. 65).

<Hold / Normal display mode of the icon>
By the way, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63A) is normally displayed as a hold icon in a normal display mode that does not suggest the degree of jackpot reliability. The hold icon in the normal display mode is moved to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon when the corresponding first special symbol determination is executed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, on the basis of the result of the prior determination process performed in response to the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is determined in the low probability low base state, There may be an icon change effect in which the hold icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 9c is changed to a hold icon in a special display mode that suggests how much the jackpot reliability is. When this icon change effect is performed, a normal display mode hold icon (for example, a white hold icon) suggests a jackpot reliability such as blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow color as a special display mode hold icon. It changes to a colored hold icon. The colors that suggest the jackpot reliability exemplified here are arranged in the order of low to high jackpot reliability, and in Example 3, the jackpot reliability of the blue hold icon is set to about 1%, and the green The jackpot reliability of the hold icon is set to about 10%, the jackpot reliability of the red hold icon is set to about 40%, the jackpot reliability of the gold hold icon is set to about 65%, and the iridescent hold The jackpot reliability of the icon is set to 100%.

  So far, the icon change effect has been described in which the display color changes only once when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, other icon change effects are provided. May be performed. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, it changes to a blue hold icon and further changes to a green hold icon. There may be an icon change effect in which the display color of the hold icon changes multiple times. Further, when a white hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

  Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c changes, and then the display color changes when the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon. As described above, there may be an icon change effect in which the icon display color changes in both the hold icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e. In addition, an icon change effect that causes the hold icon to be displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue) from the beginning, or an icon change effect that changes the display color of the hold icon whose initial color is other than white to a higher display color. May be performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c may be shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon as it is. Then, when the hold icon and the icon are not distinguished from each other, they may be collectively referred to simply as “icon”.

  So far, the hold icon and the icon change effect for the icon have been described. However, when this icon change effect is not performed, the following problems may occur. That is, as described above, since the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a and the BGM output from the speaker 67 change by shifting the normal effect mode to another normal effect mode, it is a big hit Even if the production that expects is not performed easily, the production changes, so that it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the decrease in interest.

  On the other hand, when the icon change effect is not performed, the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, and the effect is controlled in the third normal mode. And when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, in the configuration in which the hold icon and the icon in the normal display form in which the display form is completely the same are displayed, with respect to the hold icon and the icon It is thought that the change with the transition of the production mode is scarce, and the suppression of the decrease in interest is not sufficient.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in order to suppress a decrease in interest, a configuration is adopted in which a hold icon and a corresponding icon that are different in shape and size are displayed depending on four types of normal performance modes ( (See FIG. 65). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the presentation is controlled in the first normal mode, the first normal mode dedicated icon (for example, a hexagonal shape) is used as the hold icon in the normal display mode or the icon. When the hold icon or the icon (see FIG. 68A) is displayed and the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the second normal mode dedicated icon (for example, the hold icon or the icon in the normal display mode) A rhombus hold icon and the icon (see FIG. 70A) are displayed. Further, when the presentation is controlled in the third normal mode, the third normal mode dedicated icon (for example, the inverted triangular hold icon or the icon: see FIG. 71A) as the hold icon or the icon in the normal display mode. ), And when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, as the hold icon and the icon in the normal display mode, the fourth normal mode dedicated icon (for example, the hold icon in the form of a note or the icon: FIG. 66 (A)) is displayed.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to change the normal display mode of the hold icon and the icon by changing the normal effect mode to another effect mode without performing the icon change effect. Therefore, the synergistic effect with the icon change effect can effectively contribute to the suppression of the decrease in interest.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the hold icon and the normal display mode of the icon are changed for each normal effect mode, while the special display mode of the hold icon and the icon (after the icon change effect is performed). The hold icon and the display mode of the icon) are commonly used between the normal performance modes. For example, when the first normal mode and the fourth normal mode are compared, in the first normal mode, a hexagonal icon (see FIG. 68A) is displayed as an icon of the normal display mode. In the fourth normal mode, a note-shaped icon (see FIG. 66A) is displayed as the normal display mode icon, and the normal display mode differs from each other when the two icons are compared. On the other hand, in the first normal mode, when the icon change effect is performed, the hexagonal icon changes to a circular icon (of a color that suggests the jackpot reliability) (see FIG. 68 (A)). In the 4 normal mode, when an icon change effect is performed, the icon in the form of a note changes to a circular icon (of a color that suggests the jackpot reliability) (see FIGS. 66 (H) and (I)). When the icons are compared, the special display mode is common to each other. Here, the first normal mode and the fourth normal mode are described for comparison, but the same can be said when a plurality of other normal performance modes are compared.

  For example, if the configuration in which the display mode (special display mode) of the icon after the icon change effect is made different for each normal effect mode is easily adopted, the display color, shape, size, etc. of the icon are in the normal effect mode. Depending on the type, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to recognize the jackpot reliability based on the icon display mode after the icon change effect.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the icon display mode (special display mode) after the icon change is shared between the plurality of normal performance modes (the shape and size are the same). Therefore, it is possible to recognize the jackpot reliability only based on the icon display color (blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow color) after the icon change effect, and it is effective that the above problems occur. Can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, when the icons of the normal display mode displayed in each normal effect mode are compared, the shape and size are different from each other, but the case where the display colors are common will be described as an example. In other embodiments, in addition to the shape and size, the display colors may be different from each other. Further, in the third embodiment, the special display mode (here, shape and size) of the icon after the icon change effect is shared among the plurality of normal effect modes, and the jackpot is based only on the icon display color. A configuration that can recognize the reliability is adopted, but in another embodiment, the special display mode (in this case, the shape and size) of the icon after the icon change is different among a plurality of normal performance modes. The configuration may be adopted. In this case, even if the special display mode (here, shape and size) of the icon after the icon change is different, a configuration in which the jackpot reliability is the same as long as the display color is the same may be employed. Alternatively, even if the display colors are the same, a configuration in which the jackpot reliability is also different may be adopted as long as the shape and size are different.

<Design composition>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, the effect symbols displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3) in the three normal effect modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode and the fourth normal mode. The configurations are different from each other. Specifically, when the production is controlled in the normal production mode of any one of the first normal mode to the third normal mode, a number for distinguishing the production design from the other production design and the number are added to the number. An effect symbol configured to include a character image (an example of a decoration image) is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 68 to 73). On the other hand, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, an effect symbol composed only of numbers to which no character image is added is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66 and 67).

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 65, the selected music effect image related to the music selected by the player and the music effect image related to the automatically selected music are displayed. It is displayed on the first display screen 7a as a background image. For this reason, when an effect design composed of numbers and character images is superimposed and displayed on a music effect image, the visibility of the music effect image is remarkably lowered, and the interest of the effect of reproducing the music is reduced more than necessary. There is a possibility that.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, as described above, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, a number to which no character image is added. The effect symbol composed only of the symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b.

  In addition, when the three types of normal effect modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode are compared, these normal effect modes are common in that the effect symbols are configured to have numbers and character images. However, these normal effect modes are different in that the display mode of the character image constituting the effect symbol differs depending on the effect mode.

  Specifically, the effect design having the number “1” is configured to include the character image of the character A, and the effect design including the number “2” is configured to include the character image of the character B. The effect design having “3” is composed of the character image of the character C, and the effect design having the number “4” is composed of the character image of the character D, and has the number “5”. The effect design is configured to have a character image of the character E, the effect design having the number “6” is configured to have the character image of the character F, and the effect design having the number “7” is the character G An effect design having a character image and having a number “8” is configured to have a character image of the character H, and an effect design having the number “9” is a character I key. In that the correspondence between the number constituting the effect design and the type of character represented by the character image added to the number is fixed, such as having a tractor image, the first The first normal mode to the third normal mode are common.

  On the other hand, for example, when each effect symbol (hereinafter referred to as “two symbols”) configured to have the numeral “2” displayed in the first normal mode to the third normal mode is compared, the following is performed. There are significant differences. That is, the two symbols displayed when the production is controlled in the first normal mode are configured to have a character image representing the upper half of the character B as illustrated in FIG. The number “2” is added to the lower right of the character image. On the other hand, the two symbols displayed when the presentation is controlled in the second normal mode are character images representing the upper body of the character B as illustrated in FIG. A character image representing a character B that is larger than the character image constituting the two symbols (see FIG. 68A) displayed when the presentation is controlled in the normal mode, and the character image The number “2” is added to the lower right of the screen. In addition, the two symbols displayed when the presentation is controlled in the third normal mode are configured to have a character image representing the character B wearing a one-piece, as illustrated in FIG. 71 (H). At the same time, the number “2” is added to the lower center of the character image.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, even if the character images represent the same character, the display modes of the character images are different from each other depending on the effect mode.

<Variation mode>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has a feature that the variation pattern of the effect symbol is different for each normal effect mode.

(First normal mode)
Specifically, when the game is controlled in the first normal mode, the numbers “1” to “9” continuously appear in the horizontal direction from left to right in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol column is displayed in three columns in the vertical direction so that a part of the symbol column of the effect symbol described above is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 68A). As the first special symbol variation display is started, the scroll display of the three symbol sequences is started so that these symbol sequences scroll from right to left (for example, FIG. 68 (B )reference). Thus, the variation pattern of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode is a left scroll (see FIG. 65).

  As is apparent from the notation of FIG. 68 (A), the effect symbols that make up the lower symbol row are stopped in a pseudo manner in the lower left area in the effect symbol display area 7b, and then the middle symbol line is displayed. The effect symbols to be configured are stopped in a pseudo manner in the central area in the effect symbol display area 7b, and then the actual stop is performed. The effect symbols constituting the upper symbol line are falsely stopped in the upper right area in the effect symbol display area 7b. Stop this.

(Second normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the second normal mode, the numbers “1” to “9” are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect symbols is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 70A). Then, as the first special symbol variation display starts, the scroll display of the three symbol sequences is started so that these symbol sequences scroll from top to bottom (for example, FIG. 70 (B )reference). Thus, the variation pattern of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode is a downward scroll (see FIG. 65).

  As is apparent from the notation of FIG. 70 (A), the effect symbols that make up the left symbol row stop in the left region of the effect symbol display area 7b, and then stop this, and then the middle symbol row. The effect symbols constituting the symbol pattern stop in the center area of the effect symbol display area 7b and then stop, and the effect symbols constituting the right symbol pattern false stop in the right area of the effect symbol display area 7b. Stop this.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 70, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the character image constituting the effect symbol is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and subsequently corresponds to the character image. A number may be displayed on the first display screen 7a, and then a combined effect may be performed in which the character image and the number are combined to complete one effect symbol (see FIGS. 70F to 70H). . 70 (F) to (H), a character image representing the character H is displayed in the right area of the first display screen 7a, and then the number “8” is displayed in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a. The character image and the numeral “8” are displayed and moved to the left area of the first display screen 7a and are combined to exemplify how the left 8 symbols are completed.

(Third normal mode)
When the game is controlled in the third normal mode, in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), three effect symbols having any number from “1” to “9” are arranged in the horizontal direction. Is displayed (for example, see FIG. 71A). As the first special symbol variation display starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol rotate to rotate clockwise about the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, respectively. (For example, see FIGS. 71B to 71D). Then, when each effect symbol is rotated once, an effect symbol having a number added with “1” is displayed. 71 (B) to (D), the left 4 symbols are rotated clockwise to display the left 5 symbols, the middle 3 symbols are rotated clockwise to display the middle 4 symbols, and the right 1 An example is shown in which the symbol is rotated once in the clockwise direction and the right two symbols are displayed. Thus, the variation pattern of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode is autorotation (clockwise rotation with the vertical direction as the axial direction) (see FIG. 65).

  As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 71 to 73, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are rotated in a state where no character image is added, and an effect symbol composed only of numerals is simulated. When stopping, a character image corresponding to the number is added. For example, in FIGS. 71 (E) to (F), when the left 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped, a character image representing the character H that has moved from above the number “8” is combined with the number “8”. An example is shown in which a composite effect is produced in which the left 8 symbols configured to include the character image of the character H and the number “8” are completed.

(4th normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the numbers “1” to “9” are continuously written in the vertical direction from bottom to top in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect symbols is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 66A). Then, as the first special symbol variation display starts, the scroll display of the three symbol sequences is started so that these symbol sequences scroll from top to bottom (for example, FIG. 66 (B )reference). Thus, the variation pattern of the effect symbol when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode is a downward scroll (see FIG. 65).

  In this third embodiment, the variation pattern of the effect symbol in the fourth normal mode is the same as the variation pattern of the effect symbol in the second normal mode in that it is scrolled down, but is displayed during the fourth normal mode. The effect symbols to be displayed are different from the effect symbols displayed in the second normal mode in that each effect symbol does not have a character image (see FIGS. 66, 67 and 70).

  In the configuration in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol move (scroll) on the first display screen 7a, for example, the effect symbol is displayed as compared to the case where the effect symbol rotates as in the third normal mode. The area tends to widen. For this reason, if said structure is employ | adopted with respect to the 4th normal mode in which the selection music effect image is displayed, the visibility of a selection music effect image will fall easily.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the effect symbol in the third normal mode in the present embodiment 3 except that the effect symbol has a character image. A configuration common to the variation mode (spinning) may be employed. Further, an effect display in which an effect symbol composed only of numbers moves from the back to the front of the first display screen 7a is performed, and when the effect symbol moves to a predetermined position, it is erased from the first display screen 7a. When the effect symbols composed of the numbers obtained by adding “1” to the numbers constituting the erased effect symbols move in the same manner, the effect symbols are in the order of 1 symbol, 2 symbols, and 3 symbols. It is also possible to adopt another configuration in which the effect design is changed in the depth direction of the first display screen 7a, as in

<Directed by common character lines>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, a similar character image (similar image of a similar image) indicating a character common to the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol. An example) is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and there is a case where a common character serif effect is performed in which the character indicated by the similar character image emits a speech using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 (see FIG. 68-69 and FIGS. 72-73). Details of this common character line production will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69 and FIGS. 72 to 73.

  In the third embodiment, the common character line effect is performed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, and in the second normal mode or the fourth normal mode. When the production is controlled, a configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned common character line production is not executed (see FIG. 65).

  When such a configuration is adopted, the effect mode is changed from the second normal mode (or the fourth normal mode) to the first normal mode (or the third normal mode), so that the effect mode before the transition is performed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective production change.

<Synthetic production>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the character image and the number are displayed on the first display screen 7a when the production is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode. There may be a case where a combined effect is displayed in which the images are individually displayed and are combined and displayed as an effect image (see FIGS. 70 and 71). In the third embodiment, such a combined effect is executed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode, and in the first normal mode or the fourth normal mode. When the effect is being controlled, a configuration is adopted in which the above-described composite effect is not executed (see FIG. 65).

  When such a configuration is adopted, the effect mode is changed from the first normal mode (or the fourth normal mode) to the second normal mode (or the third normal mode), so that the effect mode before the transition is performed. As a result, it is possible to cause an effective production change.

[Specific example of production in the fourth normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, a specific example of an effect performed when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode while the first special symbol in the low probability low base state is being displayed. explain. Here, FIGS. 66 and 67 are screen diagrams illustrating an effect in the fourth normal mode. Here, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state, normal short reach (FIG. 62 (E ))), An effect that is executed when a variation pattern that causes a loss notification effect is selected in the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62K) directly developed will be described.

  FIG. 66A shows a first special screen corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e in a state where one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. In order to notify that the determination result of the symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, an effect symbol indicating “438” is displayed in a stopped manner as the first symbol is stopped. The state is illustrated. Here, since the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the current effect mode name “fourth effect mode” is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and FIG. Although not shown in the figure, the selected music effect image is displayed as the background image of the effect symbol in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. In addition, since the icon change effect is not performed, one hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both in the form of musical notes. It is displayed as an icon in the normal display mode.

  As described above, when a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in the present embodiment 3) elapses after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest displayed in the hold icon display area 9c The first special symbol winning / no-go determination corresponding to the hold icon (here, the hold icon in the form of a note) is executed. The determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, and the variation effect pattern that directly develops from the normal reach to the SPSP reach is used as the effect control as the variation pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol. When selected by the microcomputer 91, the following effects are performed.

  That is, as the first special symbol variation display is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon, the highest icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is displayed. The previous hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 66A and 66B). When a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of these three symbol sequences is started, for example, a step-up notice effect image (SU notice effect image) is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and this SU notice effect image is displayed. There is a case where a notice effect called SU notice that changes the display mode in steps is executed. In this SU advance notice, the jackpot reliability is suggested depending on the display color of the SU advance notice effect image and the level of the display state of the SU notice effect image.

  Subsequent to the SU notice, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect means that the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is variably displayed multiple times during the variation display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol). This is a stunning production. With regard to this pseudo-continuous effect, the following effect display is performed.

  That is, the scroll speed of the left symbol row is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) is falsely stopped, and then the scroll speed of the right symbol row is reduced (the left symbol that has been falsely stopped first) The right symbols (for example, 4 symbols) are pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the middle symbol row is reduced, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbols for informing the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 66). (See (D)).

  In this way, when the seven symbols in the middle row are pseudo-stopped after the different symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo second-sequence variation effect is started following the pseudo first-sequence variation effect. . Specifically, after the character “× 2” suggesting the start of the fluctuating second-stage variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character “× 2” is displayed on the first display. A small display is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66D and 66E). When the pseudo second-stage variation effect is being performed, for example, a SU advance notice may be executed in the same manner as during the pseudo first-sequence variation effect (see FIG. 66F).

  As described above, when the SU advance notice is executed during the pseudo second-line variation effect, the second pseudo-ream effect during the current variation display of the first special symbol is executed (see FIG. 66G). ). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 66 (G), the scroll speed of the left symbol row decreases, and the left symbol (for example, two symbols) is pseudo-stopped. The scroll speed is reduced and the right symbol (for example, five symbols) is pseudo-stopped. Thereafter, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row is lowered and seven symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbols.

  When the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the first special symbol variation display, the pseudo third-sequence variation effect is started following the pseudo second-sequence variation effect. Specifically, after the character “× 3” suggesting the start of the fluctuating third-stage variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character “× 3” is displayed on the first display. A small display is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66G and 66H).

  When a predetermined time elapses after the pseudo third variation effect is started in this way, the scroll speed of the left symbol row decreases, and the left symbol (for example, three symbols) is pseudo-stopped. Then, the scroll speed of the right symbol row decreases (same as the left symbol), and the right symbol (here, three symbols) is pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 66 (I)).

  Here, the case where the “pre-reach quasi-ream” in which the scroll display of each symbol row is temporarily suspended and restarted before the reach is established has been described as an example, but after the reach has been established, In some cases, a “post-reach pseudo-ream” is executed in which the scroll display is temporarily interrupted and then resumed. Further, both the pre-reach pseudo-ream and the post-reach pseudo-ream may be executed.

  In the third embodiment, a case where a pseudo-continuous effect in which the scroll display of the symbol sequence is temporarily interrupted and restarted is described as an example. It may not be accompanied by. That is, the pseudo-continuous effect is a non-display state in which the effect symbol is not displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b during the variation display of the first special symbol, and the center area of the first display screen 7a is in this non-display state. For example, a suggestion image that suggests execution of a pseudo-continuous effect such as “NEXT” is displayed, and an effect that makes it appear as if the effect symbol is variably displayed multiple times during one variation display of the first special symbol. Also good. When a pseudo-continuous effect that does not use such pseudo-continuous symbols (7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the middle row in the third embodiment) is executed, the non-display state is canceled immediately after the display of the suggestion image is completed. Then, by resuming the scroll display of the symbol row, it is possible to make it appear as if the effect symbol is variably displayed a plurality of times during one special symbol variability display.

  Returning to the description of the third embodiment, as described above, when the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is established, normal short reach (see FIG. 62E) is executed (see FIG. 62E). FIG. 67 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (A), the scroll speed of the middle symbol row gradually decreases after the reach is established, and the reach symbol (here, the left three symbols and the right three symbols) There is an effect display that shows that the same middle symbol (here, the middle three symbols) approaches the effective line defined by the reach symbol.

  Here, in the case of development from normal reach to SPSP reach, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the middle symbol row is being scrolled, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (here, three symbols) passes on the active line, and accordingly, the scroll rate of the middle symbol row is scrolled. As a result, the medium symbol becomes difficult to identify, and a development effect is suggested that suggests that it will develop into SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (B), in the process of moving the left three symbols to the upper left area of the first display screen 7a while being reduced, the scroll direction is set to the clockwise direction for one rotation. And then move to the upper left area, and at the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the first display screen 7a while the right three symbols are reduced, the scroll direction is rotated once in the clockwise direction and then the upper right Move to the direction area. Thereafter, until the end of the first variable display of the first special symbol, the left three symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stopped manner in the upper left region, and the right three symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stopped manner in the upper right region (FIGS. 67C to (G) )reference).

  Next, following the development effect that suggests the development to SPSP reach as described above (see FIG. 67 (B)), for example, a group notice is given as a notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit (See FIG. 67C). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (C), an effect display representing a state in which a large number of characters move from the right to the left on the first display screen 7a is performed.

  In the development effect, the background image corresponding to the fourth normal mode is changed to a black background image (black image), so that the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of the group notice is effectively improved. We are going to improve it. In addition, FIG. 67 illustrates a situation in which the advancement effect is followed by the group advance notice and then the SPSP reach is developed. Yes, the former has higher jackpot reliability than the latter.

  When the SPSP reach is started through the development effect and the group notice as described above, an SPSP reach effect image that is an effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 67D). Thereby, for example, an effect display showing a state in which the main character and the enemy character perform a battle is performed. Thereafter, when the final stage of the SPSP reach is reached, a first effect button operation promotion effect for encouraging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed (see FIG. 67E). Specifically, a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

  In the first effect button operation promotion effect, a big hit is possible at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period or when the effective period ends without the first effect button 63a being operated. For example, a cut-in for displaying a predetermined cut-in image superimposed on an effect image (other than the reach symbol) displayed on the first display screen 7a is performed as a notice effect for notifying that there is a certain property (FIG. 67 ( F)). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of reliability of the jackpot, and when a green cut-in is performed in which a green cut-in image is superimposed and a red cut-in image is superimposed. There are cases where cut-in is performed and gold cut-in that superimposes and displays a golden cut-in image. If these cut-ins are arranged in order from low to high hit reliability, green cut-in, The order is red cut-in and gold cut-in.

  Here, the case where the cut-in is performed at the timing when the valid period ends when the first effect button 63a is not operated during the valid period has been described as an example. However, in another embodiment, the valid period Another configuration may be employed in which cut-in is not performed when the first effect button 63a is not operated.

  When cut-in occurs as described above and the end of SPSP reach is reached, a second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed (see FIG. 67 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67 (G), during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b and “Press!” A character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed.

  When the second effect button 63b is operated during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the three effect symbols indicating reach losing eyes are pseudo-stopped as the operation corresponding effect according to the operation, and then the actual stop is performed. A loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 67H).

  Here, since the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the first variable display of the first special symbol is “losing”, a loss notification effect is performed as an operation corresponding effect. When the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”, as the operation corresponding effect, a three-indicating symbol indicating a doublet is falsely stopped and then a hit notification effect is performed.

  In addition, here, because the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach which is a highly reliable reach effect, the effect mode is set to the fourth normal with the start of the next variation display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol. For example, in the state where the mode is shifted to the first normal mode and the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed, scroll display of the symbol row (here, left scroll) is started (see FIG. 67 (I)). . In addition, since the mode has shifted to the first normal mode, an effect mode name “first normal mode” is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and the icon of the normal display mode in the first normal mode ( In the third embodiment, the hexagonal icon) is displayed in the icon display area 9e.

[Specific examples of effects in the first normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, a specific example of the effect performed when the first special symbol in the low probability low base state is being displayed and the effect is controlled in the first normal mode explain. Here, FIGS. 68 and 69 are screen views illustrating the effects in the first normal mode.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 65, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, an effect symbol configured to include a character image and numbers is displayed on the first display screen 7a. FIG. 68 (A) shows whether or not the first special symbol corresponding to the icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 9e (the hexagonal icon that is the normal display mode dedicated to the first normal mode). In order to notify that the determination result of the determination is “losing”, a state in which three effect symbols indicating “524” breaks are stopped is illustrated. Specifically, 5 symbols included in the lower symbol row are stopped in the lower left region in the effect symbol display region 7b, and 2 symbols included in the middle symbol row are stopped in the central region in the effect symbol display region 7b. And the state which 4 symbols contained in the upper symbol row | line | column stopped in the upper right area | region in the effect symbol display area 7b is illustrated.

  Here, since the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the current effect mode name “first effect mode” is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 68A). In addition, although not shown in FIG. 68 (A) or the like, the first normal mode dedicated background image is displayed as the background image of the effect design in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. Further, FIG. 68 (A) shows a special display mode common to the four normal effect modes as a result of the icon change effect for one hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. A state in which a hold icon (for example, a red circular hold icon) is displayed is illustrated.

  A lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in the present embodiment 3) after the effect symbol indicating the “524” break is stopped as described above. When elapses, the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, red and circular hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed. When the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit” or “losing”, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the variation effect that develops up to the pseudo third series is executed is selected. In some cases, the following effects may be executed.

<First common character line production>
That is, when the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the red circular hold icon is executed, the hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed in three columns in the vertical direction. The scroll display in the left direction of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 68A and 68B). When the left scroll of the three symbol rows is started in this manner, the lower symbol row is temporarily hidden, and the common character line effect is started. Here, the case where the first common character line effect in the current symbol variation develops to the upper limit of the third stage will be described as an example.

(Stage 1st stage)
First, the following effects are performed as the first stage effects of the first common character line effect. That is, at the start timing of the first stage effect, although not shown in FIG. 68, a similar character image showing a character A that is in common with the character image constituting one symbol included in the lower symbol row is Appears in the lower right end area of one display screen 7a. The similar character image indicating the character A is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the lower symbol row, and the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the lower symbol row is stopped and displayed. Move to the display position (for example, in FIG. 68 (A), the position where the character image indicating the character E constituting the 5 symbols is displayed: the first position), and the line “B! An effect display representing the state of emission is performed. Specifically, in addition to the similar character image indicating the character A, a serif frame including the characters “B Sa!” Is displayed. Note that the voice of the character A “Bsa!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “Bsa!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

  In the first stage effect, after a similar character image showing the same character A as one symbol is scrolled to the left in the same manner as each effect symbol included in the lower symbol row and moved to the first position, An effect display showing a state in which the character A indicated by the similar character image emits a speech is performed (see FIG. 68C). For this reason, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the lower symbol row is uttered. It is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of the effect of stopping any effect symbol in the lower left region after the scroll display is performed and the effect of the first stage.

  Note that when the first stage effect is being performed and the high-speed scroll display of the lower symbol row is also performed, the effect symbols included in the lower symbol row are displayed translucently. The display area of the effect design and the effect image related to the effect of the first stage (here, a similar character image indicating the character A and a serif frame including the characters “B Sa!”) Are displayed. Are overlapping, there is a concern that the visibility of the effect image related to the effect in the first stage is reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, as described above, the first symbol is displayed after the lower symbol row is temporarily hidden. (See FIG. 68C). FIG. 68C shows a state in which the scroll display of the upper and middle symbol rows is continued and the scroll display of the lower symbol row is interrupted.

(Stage 2)
In the second stage effect following the first stage effect, the following effects are performed. That is, at the start timing of the second stage effect, although not shown in FIG. 68, the effect display (see FIG. 68 (C)) indicating that the character A indicated by the similar character image utters continues. A similar character image showing the same character B as the two symbols included in the upper symbol row (an effect symbol composed of the numeral “2” and the character image showing the character B) in the state where the character string is displayed is Appears in the upper right end area of one display screen 7a. The similar character image indicating the character B is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the upper symbol row, and the character images constituting the effect symbols included in the upper symbol row are stopped and displayed. Move to a common display position (for example, in FIG. 68A, the position where the character image indicating the character D constituting the four symbols is displayed: the second position).

  As described above, when the similar character image indicating the character B is arranged at the second position, the display of the similar character image indicating the character A is continued. On the other hand, the similar character image indicating the character B is displayed at a position close to the similar character image indicating the character A in order to realize an effect display indicating a state of “how is the tone?” The serif frame including the characters “San!” Is deleted, and instead, the serif frame including the characters “How is the tone?” Is displayed at a position close to the similar character image indicating the character B (FIG. 68 ( D)). Note that the voice of the character B “How is the tone?” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “How is it?” Is displayed on the first display screen 7 a.

  In the second stage effect, after a similar character image showing the same character B as the two symbols is scrolled to the left in the same manner as each effect symbol included in the upper symbol row and moved to the second position. Then, an effect display indicating that the character B indicated by the similar character image emits a speech is performed (see FIG. 68D). For this reason, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the upper symbol row is uttered. It is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of the effect of stopping any effect symbol in the upper right area after scrolling in the left direction and the effect of the second stage.

  When the second stage effect is being performed, if the high-speed scroll display of the upper symbol row is also performed, the effect symbols included in the upper symbol row may be displayed in a translucent manner. The display area of these effect symbols, and the effect image related to the effect in the second stage (here, a similar character image indicating the character B and a serif frame including the characters “How is the tone?”) Are displayed. Since the region overlaps, there is a concern that the visibility of the effect image related to the effect in the second stage is lowered.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, the second row stage effect is performed after the upper row of symbol rows is temporarily hidden. I am going to do that. FIG. 68D shows a state in which the scroll display of the middle symbol row is continued and the scroll display of the lower and upper symbol rows is interrupted.

(Stage 3)
In the third stage production following the second stage production, the following production is performed. That is, when the start timing of the third stage effect is reached, a serif frame including the characters “How is the tone?” In a state where the similar character image indicating the character A and the similar character image indicating the character B are displayed. A similar character image showing a character A in which a serif frame including characters “good feeling!” For realizing an effect display indicating that the character A is emitting a word “good feeling!” Is deleted. Are displayed at positions close to each other (see FIG. 68E). Note that the sound of the character A “Good feeling!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “Good feeling!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

  In this way, in the common character line production that develops step by step until the second and subsequent stages, although the numbers constituting the production symbols are not displayed, the character images constituting the production symbols included in the lower design row Similar to a similar character image showing a character in common with (here, a character image showing character A), and a character image (in this case, a character image showing character B) constituting an effect symbol included in the upper symbol row The similar character image indicating the character to be displayed is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, an effect representing how the characters indicated by these similar character images alternately generate words is performed using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 (see FIGS. 68C to 68E).

  Therefore, it is as if the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the lower symbol row and the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the upper symbol row are having a conversation. It is possible to give the player a good impression, and it is possible to obtain a high effect in combination with the effect of variably displaying the effect symbol.

  When the third stage effect is performed as illustrated in FIG. 68 (E), all effect images related to the third stage effect are deleted, and the lower symbol row and the upper symbol row are scrolled at high speed. Display (left scroll) is resumed (see FIGS. 68E and 68F).

  In the above description, the case where the common character line effect has been developed and ended up to the upper limit of the third stage has been described as an example. When the common character line production ends without performing the first stage production, or after the first stage production is performed, the common character line production ends without performing the second stage production and the third stage production. is there.

  In addition, when comparing the common character line production that ends in the first stage production, the common character line production that ends in the second stage production, and the common character line production that ends in the third stage production, I can say that. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time is “big hit”, or even if it is “losing”, the variation time is relatively long. When the variation pattern of one special symbol is selected, the common character line effect that ends in the third stage effect is most easily executed, and the common character line effect that ends in the second stage effect is most easily executed next. The common character line production that ends in the first stage production is most difficult to execute. On the other hand, the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is “lost”, and the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Is selected, the common character line effect that ends in the first stage effect is most easily executed, the common character line effect that ends in the second stage effect is most likely to be executed next, and the third stage effect. Ending common character line production is the hardest to execute.

  For these reasons, the case where the common character line effect ending in the third stage effect is executed has the highest reliability, and the case where the common character line effect ending in the second stage effect is executed is next. The jackpot reliability is the lowest when the jackpot reliability is high and the common character line effect that ends in the first stage effect is executed.

  In addition, the common character line production has a feature that, for example, the jackpot reliability changes depending on the content of the words generated by the character in the final stage production. FIG. 68 (E) illustrates a state where a line “feel good!” Is emitted by the similar character image of character A. In addition to this, there may be a case where a message “First time” is issued, a case where a word “Large chance!” Is issued, or a case where a line “Super super hot !?” is issued. If these lines are arranged in descending order of the reliability of the jackpot, they are in the order of "Super Hot!", "Great Chance!", "Good Feeling!"

(Direction after the first common character line production ends)
Returning to the description of FIG. 68, when the first common character line effect in the current symbol variation is finished, the high-speed scroll display of the lower symbol row and the upper symbol row is resumed as described above (FIG. 68 ( F)). In this manner, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the high-speed scroll display of the upper and lower symbol rows is resumed, for example, the scroll speed of the lower symbol row gradually decreases, and the six symbols included in the lower symbol row ( The effect symbol composed of the numeral “6” and the character image of the character F) is pseudo-stopped in the lower left area of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 68 (G)). Then, the scroll speed of the upper symbol row gradually decreases, and the six symbols included in the upper symbol row are pseudo-stopped in the upper right area in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 68 (H)). As a result, reach in 6 symbols is established, and, for example, normal short reach (see FIG. 62E) is executed. Here, when the variation effect pattern for executing the post-reach pseudo-ream described above is set, the following effects are executed.

  That is, in the state where the two 6 symbols forming the reach are pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol composed only of numbers to which no character image is added rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction ( Rotation) (see FIG. 68H). Each time the middle symbol makes one revolution, the number constituting the middle symbol changes so as to increase by “1”. As a result, for example, the middle symbols change in ascending order of 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols. Here, since the variation effect pattern for executing the post-reach pseudo-ream is set, when the middle symbol changes to 7 symbols, the 7 symbols do not change to 8 symbols and the center symbol of the effect symbol display area 7b is displayed. The simulation is stopped (see FIG. 68 (I)).

  Thus, when the first pseudo-continuous effect during the current symbol variation is executed, the pseudo second-sequence variable effect following the pseudo first-sequence variable effect is started. Specifically, after the character “× 2” suggesting the start of the fluctuating second-stage variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character “× 2” is displayed on the first display. A small display is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, scroll display (left scroll) of three symbol rows is resumed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69A).

<Second common character line production>
During the pseudo second-line variation effect, the common character line effect may be executed or the common character line effect may be executed. Here, the first time during the pseudo first-sequence variable effect is performed. Common character line effects (see FIGS. 68 (C) to (E)) are executed, and the second common character line effect (see FIGS. 69 (B) to (D)) is performed during the pseudo second-line variation effect. The case where it is executed will be described as an example. In addition, the second common character line effect is composed of one stage effect (first stage effect) and two stages (first stage effect to second stage effect). In some cases, there are cases where the stage is composed of three stages (stages 1 to 3). Here, the second common character line production is the same as the first common character line production. An explanation will be given taking as an example the case of three stages of production.

(Stage 1st stage)
At the start timing of the first stage production in the second common character line production, the lower symbol row is temporarily hidden, and is not shown in FIG. 69 (B), but is included in the lower row. A similar character image showing a character H in common with the character image constituting the symbol appears in the lower right end region of the first display screen 7a. The similar character image indicating the character H is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the lower symbol row, and the character image constituting the effect symbol included in the lower symbol row is stopped and displayed. The display position (first position: see FIG. 68A) to be displayed is displayed, and an effect display representing a state where a speech “F-!” Is emitted is performed (see FIG. 69B). Specifically, in addition to the similar character image indicating the character H, a serif frame including the characters “F!” Is displayed. Note that the sound of the character H “Fsa!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the serif frame including the characters “Fsa!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

  In the first stage effect (see FIG. 68C) in the first common character line effect, the effect is executed using the similar character image indicating the character A, and the first in the second common character line effect. In the stage effects (see FIG. 69 (B)), as is apparent from the fact that the effects are executed using the similar character image representing the character H, the similar characters used for the stages of the common character line effects. The type of image is variable.

(Stage 2)
In the second stage effect following the first stage effect, the following effects are performed. That is, at the start timing of the second stage effect, the upper symbol row is temporarily hidden, and is not shown in FIGS. 69 (B) to (C), but the first stage effect. In the state where the effect display (see FIG. 69 (B)) showing that the character H indicated by the similar character image that appears appears continuously is being performed, the six symbols (numerals) included in the upper symbol row are displayed. A similar character image showing the same character F as the effect symbol (6) and a character image showing the character F) appears in the upper right end region of the first display screen 7a. The similar character image indicating the character F is scrolled to the left in the same manner as the upper symbol row, and the character images constituting the effect symbols included in the upper symbol row are stopped and displayed. To the display position (second position: see FIG. 68 (A)).

  As described above, when the similar character image indicating the character F is arranged at the second position, the display of the similar character image indicating the character H is continued. On the other hand, in order to realize an effect display indicating that the similar character image indicating the character F emits the line “Is it already over?”, The “F” displayed at the position close to the similar character image indicating the character H is displayed. The serif frame including the characters “~!” Is erased, and instead, the serif frame including the characters “already finished?” Is displayed at a position close to the similar character image indicating the character F (FIG. 69C). reference). It should be noted that the voice of the character F “It is already over?” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “It is already over?” Is displayed on the first display screen 7 a.

(Stage 3)
In the third stage production following the second stage production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the third stage effect, the speech frame including the characters “Is it already over?” Is erased while the similar character image indicating the character H and the similar character image indicating the character F are displayed. Instead, a similar frame indicating the character D is displayed in a serif frame including the characters “one more time!” For realizing an effect display indicating that the character H is uttering the word “one more time!”. It is displayed at a position close to the image (see FIG. 69D). It should be noted that the voice of the character H “Another time!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “Another time!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

(Direction after the second common character line production ends)
When the third stage effect is performed as illustrated in FIG. 69D, all effect images related to the third stage effect are deleted, and the lower symbol row and the upper symbol row are scrolled at high speed. Display (left scroll) is resumed (see FIGS. 69D and 69E).

  Here, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is suggested by the third stage effect in the second common character line effect (the effect that the character H emits the line “one more time!”: See FIG. 69D). Yes. For this reason, after the second common character line effect is completed, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed in the same manner as the first pseudo continuous effect described above with reference to FIGS. .

  Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses after the high-speed scroll display of the upper and lower symbol rows (see FIG. 69 (E)) is resumed, the scroll speed of the lower symbol row gradually decreases. The two symbols included in the symbol row (the effect symbol composed of the numeral “2” and the character image of the character B) are pseudo-stopped in the lower left area in the effect symbol display area 7b (FIG. 69F). reference). Then, the scroll speed of the upper symbol row gradually decreases, and two symbols included in the upper symbol row are pseudo-stopped in the upper right area in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69 (G)). As a result, reach with 2 symbols is established, and for example, normal short reach (see FIG. 62E) is executed.

  During the normal short reach, the post-reach pseudo-ream described above is executed. That is, in the state where the two symbols forming the reach are pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol composed only of numbers to which no character image is added rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction ( Rotation) (see FIG. 69 (G)). Each time the middle symbol makes one revolution, the number constituting the middle symbol changes so as to increase by “1”. As a result, for example, the middle symbols change in ascending order of 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols. In this way, when the middle symbol changes to 7 symbols in the process of changing, the 7 symbols do not change to 8 symbols, but stop in the middle of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69 (H)).

  In this way, when the second pseudo-continuous effect during the current symbol variation is executed, the pseudo third-sequence variable effect is started following the pseudo second-sequence variable effect. Specifically, after the character “× 3” suggesting the start of the fluctuating third-stage variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character “× 3” is displayed on the first display. A small display is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, scroll display (left scroll) of the three symbol rows is resumed in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69I).

  Here, two pseudo-continuous effects are executed, and the variable effects are developed up to the pseudo third continuous. For this reason, although not shown in FIG. 69, in most cases, it develops into a highly reliable reach effect such as the first SP reach, the second SP reach, or the SPSP reach, and the hit notification effect or the lose notification effect is executed. Will be.

(Characteristics related to common character lines)
As described above with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the first special symbol in the low probability low base state is added to the numbers constituting the effect symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol. A similar character image that is not displayed and has the same display content as the character image constituting the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display area on the first display screen 7a, and the common character line effect using the similar character image is executed. (See FIGS. 68C to 68E and FIGS. 69B to 69D).

  When the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, each effect symbol included in the three symbol rows is scroll-displayed so as to move leftward, whereas the similar character image used for the common character line effect is displayed. In the same manner, scroll display is performed so as to move leftward. Further, the common character line effect is performed in a state in which the similar character image is displayed in the same display area as the character image constituting the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, after a similar character image is variably displayed in a variation mode common to the variation mode of each effect symbol (character image and number) included in the symbol sequence, a predetermined display is performed. A common character line effect is executed using the similar character image displayed in the area. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the character images constituting the effect symbol are performing a common character line effect. A high production effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect with the character line production.

  In addition, after the similar character image is erased from the first display screen 7a with the end of the common character line production, the similar character image has a character image (character image indicating a different character) that is displayed differently from the similar character image. The effect design configured is displayed in the same display area where the similar character image is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 68E and 68G).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, a character indicating another character different from the character indicated by the similar character image in the same display area where the similar character image is displayed during the common character line effect. An effect design composed of images is displayed.
For this reason, for example, after displaying a similar character image showing the character A in a predetermined display area, the same effect can be obtained by displaying an effect design having a character image showing the same character A in the predetermined display area. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the player misidentifies that the effect symbols are continuously displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, each effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a high speed from the start to the end of the common character line effect, which makes it extremely difficult to visually recognize each effect symbol. (See FIGS. 68C to 68E). Then, after the common character line effect ends (after the similar character image is erased), an effect symbol that can be visually recognized by the player is displayed (for example, see FIG. 68 (G)).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, since there is no period in which both the similar character image and the effect design are displayed in a visible state, the character images constituting the effect design are the common character line effect. It is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of a problem that a player misidentifies a similar character image as a production symbol while pretending to be executed.

  Up to this point, the common character line effect performed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode has been described. However, as illustrated in FIG. 65, the effect is also controlled when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode. A similar common character line production is performed. The common character line effect performed when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

[Specific example of performance in the second normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a specific example of an effect performed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode while the first special symbol in the low-probability low base state is being displayed. . Here, FIG. 70 is a screen diagram illustrating an effect in the second normal mode.

  FIG. 70A shows a first special screen corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. In order to notify that the determination result of the symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, the effect symbol indicating the “513” break is stopped and displayed as the first symbol is stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the name of the current effect mode “second effect mode” is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and FIG. Although not shown in the figure, the second normal mode dedicated background image is displayed as the background image of the effect design in the entire area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 65). In addition, since the icon change effect is not performed, the two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are rhombused. It is displayed as a normal display mode icon (second normal mode dedicated icon).

  Since the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, each effect symbol (for example, see FIG. 70A) displayed on the first display screen 7a is one of the characters A to I. A character image representing the upper body and representing a character larger than a character image (for example, see FIG. 68 (A)) constituting an effect symbol displayed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode. It is comprised. In addition, a number is added to the lower right of the character image in the effect symbol displayed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode (see FIG. 70A).

  When a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in the third embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold icon (here) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c Then, the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the left-side hold icon of the two diamond-shaped hold icons (see FIG. 70A) is executed. The determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, and the variation effect pattern of the non-reach effect is produced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects are performed.

  That is, as the first special symbol variation display is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon, the highest icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is displayed. While the previous hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, the remaining hold icons are shifted toward the icon display area 9e in the hold icon display area 9c, and scroll display of three symbol rows (down scroll). Is started (see FIGS. 70A and 70B). When a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of these three symbol sequences is started, one symbol included in the symbol sequence on the left column and two symbols included in the symbol column on the right column are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 70 ( C)). In addition to the case where these symbols 1 and 2 are pseudo-stopped in the order of 1 symbol and 2 symbols, there are cases where pseudo-stop is performed in the order of 2 symbols and 1 symbol, and cases where 1 symbol and 2 symbols are falsely stopped simultaneously. is there.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, for example, six symbols included in the middle symbol row are pseudo-stopped, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, the three effect symbols indicating the “162” breaks are stopped (see FIG. 70D).

  Next, when a predetermined fixed time elapses after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, it corresponds to the earliest hold icon (see FIG. 70D) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. First special symbol success / failure determination is executed. The determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, and the variation effect pattern of the non-reach effect is produced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects may be performed.

  That is, as the first special symbol variation display is started, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon. Scroll display (down scroll) of the three symbol columns displayed in three columns is started (see FIG. 70E).

(Composition effect in the second normal mode)
When the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the above-described composite effect may be executed immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started. When this combined effect is executed, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after scroll display of the three symbol sequences is started, the three symbol sequences are not displayed (see FIG. 70F). . Then, for example, an effect display in which the character image indicating the character H constituting the 8 symbols appears in the right region of the first display screen 7a is executed (see FIG. 70F).

  Thus, when 8 symbols appear in the right region of the first display screen 7a, the number “8” appears in the upper left region of the first display screen 7a, and this number “8” is the symbol in the left column. As with the columns, scroll display is performed so as to move downward (see FIG. 70G). Similarly, as illustrated in FIG. 70G, the character image indicating the character H moves to the left as the eight symbols scroll down.

  Thereafter, when the character image indicating the character H and the numeral “8” move to the left area in the effect symbol display area 7b, these character images and numbers are combined to produce one effect symbol (here, eight symbols). Is completed (see FIGS. 70G to 70H).

  When the 8 symbols completed by the synthesis effect are pseudo-stopped in the left area of the effect symbol display area 7b, for example, four symbols included in the middle symbol row and five symbols included in the right symbol row are displayed. When moving from above (see FIG. 70 (I)), the three effect symbols showing the “845” discoloration stop falsely, and the lossy symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. There are cases in which three effect symbols indicating “” are stopped.

  As described based on FIG. 70, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, a combined effect that combines the character image and the number may be executed. In this way, in addition to the case where the effect symbol is formed from the beginning, the effect symbol may be formed on the first display screen 7a. By repeating the above, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the production becomes monotonous and as a result the interest is lowered.

  In addition, although the case where the synthetic effect in which the effect symbols included in the left symbol row (here, the left 8 symbols: refer to FIG. 70 (H)) is formed has been described as an example, the middle row There is a case where a combined effect in which an effect symbol included in the symbol row is formed or a combined effect in which an effect symbol included in the right symbol row is formed is executed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, during the one-time variation display of the first special symbol, the effect symbol (left symbol) included in the left symbol column and the effect symbol (medium symbol) included in the middle symbol column ) And any one of the effect symbols (right symbol) included in the right symbol row (in the example shown in FIG. 70, the left symbol is 8). I do. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, during the display of the variation of the first special symbol, a composite effect for forming the left symbol is performed, and then a composite effect for forming the right symbol is performed. You may make it perform the synthetic | combination effect of times.

  Further, in the third embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which the combined effect is executed immediately after the first special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol are started, but in other embodiments, for example, when reach is established When performing a synthetic effect that forms an effect symbol that will be a reach symbol, or when three effect symbols that indicate losing eyes (reach loser eyes or loose eyes) are pseudo-stopped at the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol. , A composite effect that forms any one of the effect symbols may be performed.

[Specific example of performance in the third normal mode]
Next, referring to FIG. 71 to FIG. 73, a specific example of an effect performed when the first special symbol in the low probability low base state is being displayed and the effect is controlled in the third normal mode. Will be described. Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are screen views illustrating the effects in the third normal mode.

  FIG. 71A shows a first special screen corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. In order to notify that the determination result of the symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, the effect symbol indicating the “431” variation is stopped and displayed as the first symbol is stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the current effect mode name “third effect mode” is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and FIG. Although not shown in the figure, in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, a background image dedicated to the third normal mode is displayed as a background image of the effect design (see FIG. 65). Further, since the icon change effect is not performed, the two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both inverted triangles. The normal display mode icon (third normal mode dedicated icon) is displayed.

  Since the effects are controlled in the third normal mode, each effect symbol (for example, see FIG. 71A) displayed on the first display screen 7a is any one of the characters A to I wearing one piece. A character image representing such a character, and a corresponding numeral is added to the lower end of the center of each character image.

  In order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the icon illustrated in FIG. 71 (A) is “lost”, the predetermined symbol is displayed after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. When the fixed time elapses, it corresponds to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (here, the left hold icon of two inverted triangle hold icons: see FIG. 71A). First special symbol success / failure determination is executed. The determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, and the variation effect pattern of the non-reach effect is produced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects are performed.

  That is, as the first special symbol variation display is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon, the highest icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is displayed. While the previous hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, the remaining hold icons are shifted toward the icon display area 9e in the hold icon display area 9c, and the variable display of the three effect symbols is started. (See FIG. 71 (B)).

  When the effect is controlled in the third normal mode and the first special symbol is stopped, the character image corresponding to any of the numbers “1” to “9” is added to the effect symbol display area 7b. Three effect symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 71A). On the other hand, when the variation display of the next first special symbol is started, the character image is deviated from the numbers of the three effect symbols, and each effect symbol is a process in which the numbers of the effect symbols change, The character image is variably displayed without being added (see FIGS. 71B to 71D).

  The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each rotate so as to rotate clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction (see, for example, FIGS. 71B to 71D). Then, when each effect symbol is rotated once, an effect symbol having a number added with “1” is displayed. 71 (B) to (D), the left 4 symbols are rotated clockwise to display the left 5 symbols, the middle 3 symbols are rotated clockwise to display the middle 4 symbols, and the right 1 The state where the symbol is rotated once in the clockwise direction and the two right symbols are displayed is illustrated.

(Composition effect in the second normal mode)
When a predetermined time elapses after the first special symbol and the effect symbol change display is started, a synthesis effect different from the synthesis effect (see FIGS. 70 (G) to (H)) performed in the second normal mode is generated. Executed. That is, for example, the left symbol indicating “8” is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the left region in the effect symbol display area 7b, and accompanying this, the effect display indicating that the character image indicating the character H moves from above. Is performed (see FIG. 71E). Then, a composition effect is performed in which the character image representing the character H and the numeral “8” are synthesized (see FIGS. 71E to 71F). FIG. 71 (F) illustrates a state in which the variable display of the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued in a state where the left eight symbols are pseudo-stopped.

  Thus, when the composite effect that forms the left symbol (here, the left eight symbols) is executed, the composite effect that forms the right symbol is executed in a state where the left eight symbols are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 71 ( G) to (H)). In other words, for example, the right symbol indicating “2” is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the right region in the effect symbol display area 7b, and accordingly, the effect display indicating that the character image indicating the character B moves from above. Is performed (see FIG. 71 (G)). Then, a composition effect is performed in which the character image indicating the character B and the number “2” are combined (see FIGS. 71 (G) to (H)). FIG. 71 (G) illustrates a state in which a special hold icon is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 9c as the second hold icon. FIG. 71 (H) illustrates a state in which the middle symbol variation display is continued in a state where the right two symbols are pseudo-stopped in addition to the left eight symbols.

  In this way, when the composite effect that forms the right symbol (here, the right two symbols) is executed, the composite effect that forms the middle symbol is executed in a state where the left eight symbols and the right two symbols are pseudo-stopped. (See FIGS. 71 (I) and 72 (A)). In other words, for example, the middle symbol indicating “6” is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the central region of the effect symbol display area 7b, and accompanying this, the effect display indicating that the character image indicating the character F moves from above. Is performed (see FIG. 71 (I)). Then, a composition effect is performed in which the character image indicating the character F and the numeral “6” are combined (see FIGS. 71 (I) to 72 (A)). FIG. 72 (A) exemplifies a state in which the left 8 symbol, the right 2 symbol, and the middle 6 symbol to which the corresponding character images are added are pseudo-stopped. This is stopped as the first special symbol reporting "" is stopped and displayed.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed. The determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, and the variation effect pattern of the non-reach effect is produced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects may be performed.

  That is, as the first special symbol variation display is started, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon. The remaining hold icon (here, the hold icon in the special display mode) displayed in the display area 9c is shifted in a direction approaching the icon display area 9e (see FIGS. 72A and 72B).

  When the first special symbol variation display is started, the character image indicating the character H is removed from the left 8 symbols, the character image indicating the character F is removed from the middle 6 symbols, and the character indicating the character B is displayed from the right 2 symbols. The image is removed, and the change display of the three effect symbols to which the character image is not added is started (see FIGS. 72A to 72C). In addition, since it is the same as that of what was mentioned above based on FIG.71 (B)-(D) about the change display of these three effect symbols, detailed description here is abbreviate | omitted.

(Common character line production in 3rd normal mode)
When the production is controlled in the third normal mode, a common character line production similar to the common character dialogue production performed when the production is controlled in the first normal mode is executed. Here, an example will be described in which the common character line effect is composed of a single stage effect, and the common character line effect of the production content related to the common character line effect performed in the next symbol variation is executed. .

  As shown in FIG. 72B, when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the three effect symbols to which the character image is not added, for example, the character D that is common to the character images constituting the four symbols. A similar character image indicating “” appears in the upper left end region of the first display screen 7a. The character image indicating the character D is the same display position where the character image forming the left symbol is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 72A, the character indicating the character H configuring the left eight symbol). (Display position where the image is displayed), and an effect display representing a state where a line “A Sa !!” is emitted is performed (see FIG. 72D). Specifically, in addition to the similar character image indicating the character D, a serif frame including the characters “A!” Is displayed. It should be noted that the voice of the character D “A Sa!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “A Sa!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

  This common character line effect (see FIG. 72 (D)) is an effect related to the first common character line effect (see FIG. 72 (H)) performed in the next symbol variation, and is similar to character A. It has a function as a notice effect for notifying that the character image will appear with the next symbol variation. When such a common character line effect is being executed, the middle symbol and the right symbol are continuously displayed (see FIG. 72D).

(Direction after the common character line production ends)
As described above, when the common character line effect as the effect display indicating that the character D calls the character A is executed, a similar character image indicating the character D that appears in the common character line effect is, for example, leftward. It moves and is erased from the first display screen 7a. FIG. 72E illustrates a state in which the similar character image indicating the character D is being erased from the first display screen 7a after the common character line effect is finished.

  When the common character line effect ends in the flow as described above, the variable display of the left symbol is resumed, and the three effect symbols similar to the state shown in FIG. 72C are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, although not shown in FIG. 72, a composition effect for combining the character image indicating the character E with the number “5”, a composition effect for combining the character image indicating the character D and the number “4”, As the character image indicating the character F and the composition effect for synthesizing the numeral “6” are executed, and the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, “456” illustrated in FIG. The production design showing the "" In addition, since each synthetic | combination effect regarding these three production | presentation designs is performed similarly to each synthetic | combination effect mentioned above based on FIG.71 (E)-(I) and FIG.72 (A), detailed description here is carried out. Omitted.

  The first special symbol for notifying the loss is stopped and displayed, and when a predetermined fixed time has elapsed after the three production symbols showing the “546” breakage are stopped, they are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the first hold icon (here, the hold icon in the special display mode, for example, the red and circular hold icon: see FIG. 72F) is executed.

  When the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed, the first hold icon (the hold icon in the special display mode) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is displayed as the first special symbol is changed. ) Is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, the character image indicating the character E is removed from the left 5 symbols, the character image indicating the character D is removed from the middle 4 symbols, and the character F is displayed from the right 6 symbols. The character image shown is removed, and the variable display of the three effect symbols to which the character image is not added is started (see FIGS. 72 (F) to (G)). In addition, since it is the same as that of what was mentioned above based on FIG.71 (B)-(D) about the change display of these three effect symbols, detailed description here is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the following description based on FIGS. 72 (G) to 72 (I) and FIG. 73, two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the red and circular icons. An example will be described in which the first common character line effect is executed during the first-stage variation effect, and the second common character line effect is executed during the pseudo third-sequence change effect.

<First common character line production>
When the red and circular hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, and the change display of the three effect symbols is started, the first change in the current symbol change is started. Are performed (see FIG. 72H). Specifically, the similar character image indicating the character A called the character D indicated by the similar character image that appeared during the previous symbol change (see FIG. 72D) is the upper left edge of the first display screen 7a. Appears in partial areas. The character image indicating the character A is the same display position where the character image forming the left symbol is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 72A, the character indicating the character H configuring the left eight symbol). The display frame is moved to the display position where the image is displayed, and a line frame including the characters “NEXT!” Is displayed at a close position (see FIG. 72H). Further, the voice of the character A “NEXT is!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “NEXT!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a. When such a common character line effect is being executed, the middle symbol and the right symbol are continuously displayed (see FIG. 72H).

  This first common character line production suggests execution of a pseudo-series production. That is, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 69 (B), it is not the effect of the content called to the character indicated by the other similar character image. For this reason, the first common character line effect ends with the effect of the first stage without the effects of the second and subsequent stages being executed.

  As described above, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the current symbol variation is regarded as the second symbol variation, and the previous symbol variation is regarded as the first symbol variation, the second symbol variation. During the change, the common character line effect (see FIG. 72 (H)) related to the common character line effect (see FIG. 72 (D)) performed during the first symbol change is executed.

(Common character line production / production after the first round)
As described above, when the first common character line effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the similar character image indicating the character A is displayed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 1 is erased from the display screen 7a (see FIG. 72I). As described above, when the similar character image indicating the character A is deleted, the left symbol variation display is resumed, and the three effect symbols are variably displayed (see FIG. 73A).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the three effect symbols are variably displayed, there is a combined effect in which the character image of the character A and the number “1” are combined in the left area of the effect symbol display area 7b. At the same time, in the right area, a composite effect is also performed in which the character image of the character A and the numeral “1” are combined. As a result, reach is established with one symbol (see FIG. 73B).

  Here, since the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is suggested by the first common character line effect described above based on FIG. 72 (H), the above-described normal short reach executed after the reach establishment is described above. A post-reach pseudo-ream is executed (see FIG. 73C). That is, in the state where the two symbols forming the reach are pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol composed only of numbers to which no character image is added rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction ( Rotation (see FIG. 73 (B)), and the middle 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the central area of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 73 (C)).

  Thus, when the first pseudo-continuous effect during the current symbol variation is executed, the pseudo second-sequence variable effect following the pseudo first-sequence variable effect is started. Specifically, after the character “× 2” suggesting the start of the fluctuating second-stage variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character “× 2” is displayed on the first display. A small display is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a. Accordingly, in the effect symbol display area 7b, the variable effect display of the three effect symbols composed only of numbers to which no character image is added is resumed (FIG. 73 ( D)).

  Then, during the pseudo second-stage variation effect, the middle seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in a state where reach has been established for the five symbols, whereby the second pseudo-ream effect for the current symbol variation is executed (FIG. 73). (See (E)). As described above, when the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo third-sequence variation effect is started following the pseudo second-sequence variation effect. Specifically, after the character “× 3” suggesting the start of the fluctuating third-stage variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character “× 3” is displayed on the first display. A small display is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a. Accordingly, in the effect symbol display area 7b, the variable effect display of the three effect symbols composed only of numbers to which no character image is added is resumed (FIG. 73 ( F)).

<Second common character line production>
During the pseudo third-line variation effect developed in this way, the second common character line effect in the current symbol variation is executed (see FIGS. 73 (G) to (I)). This second common character line effect is configured as a three-step effect, and is similar to the common character line effect (see FIGS. 68 (C) to (E)) performed in the first normal mode. It is configured.

(Stage 1st stage)
In the first stage effect, first, a similar character image showing a character D that is common to the character images constituting the left four symbols appears in the upper left end region of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image indicating the character D moves downward so as to be arranged at the same display position (left / common display position) as the character image constituting the left pattern is displayed. Is moved to the left / common display position, a dialogue frame including the characters “G!” Is displayed at a close position (see FIG. 73G). In addition, the voice of the character D “Gsa!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “Gsa!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Such a first stage effect is performed in a state in which the left and right symbol variation display is interrupted and the middle symbol and right symbol variation display is continued.

(Stage 2)
When the start timing of the second stage effect is reached, first, a similar character image showing a character G that is common to the character images constituting the right 7 symbols appears in the upper right end region of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image indicating the character G moves downward so as to be arranged at the same display position (right / common display position) as the character image constituting the right design is displayed. Moves to the right / common display position. Then, the serif frame including the characters “G Sa!” Is deleted, and the serif frame including the characters “What is it?” Representing the serif of the character G is close to the similar character image indicating the character G. (See FIG. 73H). In addition, the voice of the character G “What is it?” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “What is it?” Is displayed on the first display screen 7 a. Such a second stage effect is performed in a state in which the variation display of the left symbol and the right symbol is interrupted and the variation display of the middle symbol is continued.

(Stage 3)
In the third stage production, the serif frame including the characters “What is it?” Is erased, and the serif frame including the characters “Large chance!” Indicating the character D's serif is a similar character indicating the character D. It is displayed at a position close to the image (see FIG. 73 (I)). In addition, the voice of the character D “Large Chance!” Is output from the speaker 67 at the timing when the speech frame including the characters “Large Chance!” Is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

  There are “chance”, “great chance”, and “gekiatsu” in the lines displayed in the third stage production. Here, the “chance” line suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low, and when a line frame including the word “chance” is displayed, the first SP reach, the second SP reach, It is difficult to develop a high-reliability reach production such as SPSP reach, and even if it develops, it has a feature that a loss notification production is easy to be executed. In addition, the “Big Chance” line suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is medium, and if a line containing the word “Big Chance” is displayed, the word “Chance” is included. Compared to the case where a serif frame is displayed, it is easy to develop a highly reliable reach effect such as the first SP reach, the second SP reach, or the SPSP reach, and the hit notification effect is easily performed in any of these reach effects. It has the characteristics. In addition, the line of “Gekiatsu” suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, and when a dialogue frame including the characters of “Gekiatsu” is displayed, an extremely high probability (for example, 90 %) Has developed into a highly reliable reach production such as the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, and the SPSP reach, and has a feature that the hit notification production is easier to execute than when other lines are displayed. is doing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 73, the fluctuating effect has been developed to the pseudo third station, and the line “Large chance!” Is displayed, so the first SP reach, the second SP reach, or the SPSP reach is displayed. The hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the jackpot reliability is configured to change depending on how many stages the common character line production develops, and the jackpot reliability is arranged in the order from low to high. In this case, the common character line effect ends in the first stage, the common character line effect ends in the second stage, and the common character line effect ends in the third stage. In addition, the jackpot reliability is configured to change depending on how many times the common character line effect is performed during one variation display of the first special symbol, in order of increasing jackpot reliability from highest to lowest. If the common character line effect is executed only once during one variation display of the first special symbol, the common character line effect is executed twice during one variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the common character line effect is executed three times during the first variation display of the first special symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, when the production is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, the common character line production may be executed, whereas the second normal production is performed. When the production is controlled in the mode or the fourth normal mode, there is a feature that the common character dialogue production is not executed.

  As described above, since there are an effect mode in which the common character line effect is executed and an effect mode in which the common character line effect is not executed, by changing the effect mode between the effect mode that is executed and the effect mode that is not executed, the common character Since the line production is executed or, conversely, the common character line production is not executed, it is possible to cause an effective production change.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, an effect symbol constituted by having a character image and a number is variably displayed along with a variation display of the first special symbol, and accompanied by a stop display of the first special symbol. The effect symbol may be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. On the other hand, character images and numbers may be displayed individually, and these character images and numbers may be combined and displayed as an effect design (for example, FIG. 70 (F) to (H), FIG. 71 ( E) to (F)). For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which effect design is displayed based on the displayed character image (or number), and the character image and the number are still synthesized. In comparison, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect of displaying the effect symbol.

  In addition, display of numbers (or character images) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of character images (or numbers) is started, and these character images and numbers are combined and displayed as effect designs. . In this way, since the character images and numbers constituting the effect symbol are displayed in order and the effect symbols are formed, the effect symbol does not change from the state where the effect symbols are composed of the character image and the numerals. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is possible to obtain extremely high effects.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the effect using the similar character image is the common character line effect has been described as an example. However, the effect using the similar character image is not limited to the common character line effect, for example, the similar character image indicates There may be an effect in which the character notifies the transition of the effect mode, or an icon change effect in which the character indicated by the similar character image changes the display mode of the icon.

[Processes executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the following processing is executed in order to realize the effects described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73.

(Processing related to fluctuation effects)
The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status in the process of step S4503 (see FIG. 52), so that the current effect mode is the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and Which of the fourth normal modes is specified.

  Although not shown in the figure, the ROM of the sub control board 90 stores a variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect pattern determination table. The variation effect pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern that is an effect pattern of a variation effect including a variation display of effect symbols. The notice effect pattern determination table in the third embodiment is a table that is referred to when determining notice effect patterns that are effect patterns of various notice effects for notifying the possibility of a big hit prior to the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect). It is.

  In the third embodiment, a variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect pattern determination table are prepared for each effect mode. The ROM of the sub control board 90 includes at least a first normal mode / variation effect pattern determination table, 2 normal mode / variation effect pattern determination table, third normal mode / variation effect pattern determination table, fourth normal mode / variation effect pattern determination table, first normal mode / notification effect pattern determination table, second normal A mode / notice effect pattern determination table, a third normal mode / notice effect pattern determination table, and a fourth normal mode / notice effect pattern determination table are stored.

  In the process of step S4504 (see FIG. 52), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a change corresponding to the effect mode (normal effect mode) specified in the process of step S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. The effect pattern determination table and the notice effect pattern determination table are read from the ROM of the sub control board 90 and set in the RAM of the sub control board 90.

  In the subsequent process of step S4505 (see FIG. 52), the effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the random effect determination random number acquired in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the first special Based on the pattern variation pattern, the variation effect pattern is set by reading one variation effect pattern from the variation effect pattern determination table set in the RAM. Although detailed description is omitted, by executing this variation effect pattern setting processing, the symbol configuration of the effect symbol, the variation pattern of the effect symbol, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect constituting the reach symbol The type of design, the type and content of reach production, the content, the presence / absence of the composite production (see FIG. 65), the type of production design to be stopped, the type of background image, BGM, etc. It is determined.

  Also, in the process of step S4506 (see FIG. 52), the effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the notice effect determination random number acquired in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the first Based on the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation effect pattern set in step S4505, the notice effect pattern is set by reading one notice effect pattern from the notice effect pattern determination table set in the RAM. By executing the notice effect pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not various notice effects are to be executed, and in what kind of effect pattern the notice effect is executed. As the notice effect, in Example 3, for example, SU notice (see FIG. 66C), group notice (see FIG. 67C), cut-in (see FIG. 67F), common character line, etc. An effect (see FIG. 65) is given as an example.

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability high base state, the high probability high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. If the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy base state in addition to or in addition to such a big hit type, the number of times determined in advance in the high-accuracy high-base state If the big win is not made until the special symbol variation display of (50 or 100) is completed, a big hit type in which the gaming state changes to the high probability low base state may be provided. By providing such a big hit type, the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a high base state, and when a special symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times is executed in the high base state, depending on the big hit type, The game state has a case of shifting to the low probability and low base state, a case of continuing the high probability and high base state, and a case of shifting to the high probability and low base state.

  As a result, it is possible to diversify the game mode change mode (transition mode), increase the game playability, and enhance the game entertainment. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game until a predetermined number of special symbol variations are displayed, a predetermined number of special symbol variations are displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which game state the game state is to be transferred to after the game is executed. Thereby, the player's gaming interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for an advantageous state is enhanced. In addition, even if the gaming state after the big hit game is not in the high probability low base state but in the high base state, the game state is changed to the high probability low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations thereafter. It is possible to play a game in anticipation of this. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long time.

  In the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49). ) Are controlled by the main control unit. In place of such a mode, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation) Display control of c1 and c2) of the status indicator 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. Thereby, even if a failure occurs in the display control of one control unit, it is possible to notify correct game information if the display control of the other control is appropriate. Further, both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are provided in the same display unit (main display 40). Thereby, the first special symbol display device controlled by the main control unit and the second special symbol display device controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity so that the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control can be performed. It is possible to easily check whether there is any problem with the device.

  Similarly, in the first embodiment, the main control unit controls the display of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49). To do. In place of such a mode, the display control of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is performed by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. Thereby, there exists an effect similar to the special symbol display mentioned above.

  Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second normal symbol display, a second first special figure hold indicator, a second second special figure hold indicator (not shown), a second common figure, not shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second special figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42) are main-controlled. Other control units such as a sub-control unit, the second special figure hold indicator (the first special figure hold indicator, the second special figure hold indicator), the second special figure hold indicator You may make it control by. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first special figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42), the first Two special figure hold indicators (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and second universal figure hold indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the both, easily check the consistency of the display contents, and easily check whether there is a problem in the display control.

  Also, a first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), a first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42), a first special symbol display indicator (First special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first general figure hold indicator (common figure hold indicator 42), second special symbol indicator (variation state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special figure hold indicator (the second first special figure hold indicator, the second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second general-purpose hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily check whether there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. The main display 40 can be provided outside (outside) the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 outside (outside) the game area 3.

  In addition, when there is a power interruption (power interruption processing) for some reason during a game or during operation of the gaming machine (power ON), the display is controlled by the main control unit when power is supplied again. Special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 41a and second special symbol indicator 41b), first normal symbol indicator (normal symbol indicator 42), first special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first general figure hold indicator (common figure hold indicator 42) execute display (display control) first (restart and return). The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special figure, which are controlled by the sub-control unit. Hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), second common figure hold示器 run the display (display control) after the (resumption, return) to.

  However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special display controlled by the sub-control unit. An image display apparatus in which the figure hold display (second first special figure hold display, second second special figure hold display) and second universal figure hold display are also controlled by the sub-control unit. Display (display control) is executed (resumed and restored) earlier than (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display turns on / off / flashes each single LED, while the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / or the first display device). This is because the three-image display device 72) includes a liquid crystal display unit and has more complicated display control than the main display.

  Thereby, even if it is a display part which shows the special symbol propriety determination result and fluctuation state controlled by the same sub control part, the first sub display part which returns a display promptly after power-on (after power restoration) And a second sub display unit for returning the display after a delay. And according to each role, it becomes possible to perform optimal game control. The first sub display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variation state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (the variation state display 49) that are controlled by the sub control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), the second general figure hold indicator, and the simple With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly return after the power is turned on again. The second sub display unit corresponds to an image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / or the third image display device 72) that is also controlled by the sub control unit. In addition, it is possible to display various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) with complicated display control, and to improve the taste by various game effects.

  Further, in another aspect, when power is turned off for some reason during a game or during operation of the gaming machine (power is on), if power is supplied again, the sub-control unit The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second normal symbol indicator (c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second special symbol hold indicator (first 2 first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), the second universal figure hold indicator performs display (display control) first (resume, return), main control unit The first special symbol display (the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b), the first normal symbol display (the normal symbol display 42), the first special symbol, which are display-controlled. Hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first general figure hold indicator (general The hold display device 42) performs display (display control) later (resume, return), and the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, or / and the display control is performed by the sub-control unit) The third image display device 72) may further perform display (display control) after that (restart or return).

  In the embodiment described above, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set according to the game state as a special symbol (first special symbol described later) set as the main game in the game state. Alternatively, the variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the gaming state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. And a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the fluctuation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is changed to the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the main subject of the game in the gaming state is largely displayed (main subject) And the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the main subject of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, not always displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, but displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol according to the gaming state and the game situation, and the first There may be a case where one of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) is displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a “variable entrance” that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter, and a state where the game ball cannot enter, “Special game execution means” capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter a ball when the result of the 1-win / no-go determination or the second win-win determination is successful. Further, the “second starter” may be a variable starter that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which a game ball enters the variable start port has a predetermined frequency, and a game in which a game ball enters the variable start port is higher than the game state. “Game state setting means” for setting the state (second game state) can be provided. Here, “predetermined frequency” includes zero.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is set to one. It may be a plurality of times or may have a different number of rounds of opening. In the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed simultaneously. However, the second special figure hold is prioritized over the first special figure hold. Also, a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure hold is prioritized over the second special figure hold, or a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be used. Also, the priority order is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called order of entering (memory order) digestion may be used.

  Also, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and can enter a game ball that can enter and a game ball can enter There is a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit, the large winning opening is made available for a predetermined time. This is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening in a ball ready state and the game ball passes through a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called “1 type 2 type mixing machine”. When the result of the determination of success / failure based on the ball entering the start opening becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering game balls into the start opening. Moreover, it has a 1st starting port and a 2nd starting port, and it shall generate | occur | produce the high base state which raises the entrance frequency to the 2nd starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the probability of hitting can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by the non-operation / operation of the probability variation function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Also good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. A plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the gaming machine is turned on. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined for the prior determination based on the starting entrance. Although (pre-determination) is performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on starting entry) to be subjected to prior determination is stored in the main control unit and sub-control. The acquired information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, it is possible to erase the acquisition information (acquisition information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Or it is good also as what pre-determines about the acquisition information acquired based on starting entrance instead of pre-determining about the acquisition information memorize | stored in the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. That is, it may be determined in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to prior determination separately from the special figure storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquisition information stored in the special figure storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  In the embodiment described above, one image display device 7 (board-side display means) is provided as the main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Is provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) as sub liquid crystal (sub display device), but the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the main liquid crystal (first image display) as a panel display means. Provide one sub liquid crystal on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can do. Alternatively, it is possible to provide one or two or more sub liquid crystals on the game board side while including the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the gaming machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of the display device is not limited to liquid crystal. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices including a main display device and a sub display device may be mixed. Specifically, for example, of the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device. The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, a variety of effects can be displayed by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification are disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine has a first start port, a second start port, a first grand prize port, and a second grand prize port. When a game ball enters the first start port, the first symbol is variably displayed. 2. When a game ball entered the start opening, there was a display that variably displayed the second symbol. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, either the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is opened, or the first big prize opening and the second big prize are opened. There has been a gaming machine that executes a jackpot game in which a winning opening is opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the second start port is a variable start port, the entry frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the entry frequency is increased in the high base state. There was a game aimed at one starting port and a game aimed at the second starting port in a high base state. In addition, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in the low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once the advantageous state is reached, the right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide highly interesting gaming properties.

  The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and unlike conventional gaming machines, provides a highly interesting gaming state, diversifies the transition state of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. A game machine is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A third start opening where game balls can enter;
First hit / fail judgment execution means for executing a first hit / no-go judgment based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port;
Second hit / fail judgment execution means for executing a second hit / no-go judgment executed based on a ball entering the third start port;
A first gaming state in which a game ball enters the second starting port at a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the second starting port at a higher frequency than the first gaming state. , A game state setting means capable of setting,
A gaming machine comprising special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first success / failure determination or the second success / failure determination is a big hit (first specified result), wherein the first start The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second start port and the third start port are provided in the second game area,
In the first game state, a first game (low-low-low base state) is executed by launching a game ball in the first game area and mainly performing the first success / failure determination, and in the second game state, the second game. A second game (low-accuracy base state) in which a game ball is fired in an area and executed mainly as a result of the first success / failure determination; and a game ball is fired in the second game area in the first game state to And a third game (highly accurate and low base state) that is executed mainly by determining whether or not the player is correct.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start port for executing the first winning / failing determination is arranged in the first gaming area, and the first winning / failing determination is executed in the second gaming area (the first state and the second state). A variable type second start port and a third start port for executing the second determination of whether or not it is present. In addition, the gaming state includes a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port is low (a predetermined frequency) and a frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port than in the first gaming state. A high second gaming state. In the first gaming state, the first game that fires aiming at the first starting port of the first gaming area and executes the first winning / nothing determination as a main subject, and the second starting port of the second gaming area in the second gaming state The first game that fires aiming at the first game and executes the first hit / fail judgment as the subject, and the first game that launches aiming at the third start port of the second game area and executes the second hit / fail judgment as the subject 1 game.

  Thereby, the player can perform the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and can enhance the game interest by changing the various game states and the new game characteristics. It becomes possible. In the first gaming state, the frequency of entering the first game area and entering the first starting port is higher than the frequency of entering the second starting area and launching into the second starting area. May be higher.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-1.
As a result of the first success / failure determination in the first game for firing a game ball in the first game area, the game has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the first success / failure determination in the second game for firing a game ball in the second game area, the game has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the second success / failure determination in the third game for firing a game ball in the second game area, the game has a third big hit and a fourth big hit,
In the first game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big win. age,
In the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big win. age,
In the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is the fourth big win. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first winning / failing determination in the first game for launching the game ball in the first gaming area and the first winning / failing determination in the second game for firing the game ball in the second gaming area. As a result, there are a first big hit and a second big hit, and there are a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment in the third game in which a game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the second big hit is reached. Also, when the second game is reached, the second game can be executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the second big hit is reached. Also, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the fourth big hit.

  Thus, regardless of whether the first big hit or the second big hit is caused by the first game after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing the game ball to the second game area. In addition, while performing a game to be launched into the second game area, whether the second game or the third game is performed, a game that performs the first determination (second game), 2. It is possible to play a game while changing the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) in which the determination of success / failure is made. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest through various game state transition modes and novel gaming characteristics.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2,
In the second game, the second game state is changed to the first game state based on execution of the first success / failure determination a specific number of times, and the first game is shifted to the first game. .

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that, in the second game, when the first winning / failing determination is executed a specific number of times, the second gaming state is changed to the first gaming state and the first game is entered. As a result, the game is shifted from the second game to the first game by executing a specific number of determinations. Further, in a game in which the same first win / fail determination is performed, the game is shifted from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest through various game state transition modes and novel gaming characteristics.

  Note that the third game may continue the third game even when the second success / failure determination is executed a specific number of times. Further, the third game may be continued until the second winning / failing determination result is a big hit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
As a result of the second success / failure determination, there is a small hit (second specific result), and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of gaming profit can be obtained,
The second success / failure determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first success / failure determination,
In the second game, the execution rate of the first success / failure determination is higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that in the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game because the game profit can be obtained by the small hit.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a result of the second success / failure determination, there is a small hit that can acquire a predetermined amount of gaming profit, and the second success / failure determination is smaller with a higher probability than the first success / failure determination. It will be a hit. That is, the third game is a small hit with a higher probability than the first game and the second game. In addition, the second game that is in the second gaming state has a higher execution frequency of the first winning / failing determination than the first game that is in the first gaming state. In the second game, the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. Thus, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. This also makes it possible to diversify the transition modes between various gaming states having different degrees of advantage, and to enhance the gaming interest with new gaming characteristics. In addition, it is good also as what has a small hit as a result of a 2nd success / failure determination, and does not have a small hit as a result of a 1st determination.

  Moreover, you may have the 4th game (highly accurate high base state) which discharge | releases a game ball | bowl to a 2nd game area | region in the 2nd game state, and performs it by making a 1st winning / failing determination main. Also, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Also, in the fourth game, the frequency of the first success / failure determination is made higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease rate of the game medium is slower than that in the first game. By making it possible to obtain a profit, the decrease rate of the game medium may be slower than those of the second game and the fourth game. In addition, since the second game and the fourth game are both in the second game state, the decrease rate of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first winning / failing determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big winning in the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first winning / failing determination becomes the second big hit ( When the 15R first big hit and the 4R second big hit in the first embodiment are reached, the third game can be executed, and the first determination result is the fifth big hit (corresponding to the 4R third big hit in the first embodiment). The fourth game can be executed,
In the second game, when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big hit (Example) 1 is equivalent to 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the first hit / fail judgment is fifth jackpot (corresponding to 4R third jackpot of Embodiment 1), the fourth game is executed. Making the game viable,
In the third game, when the result of the second win / fail decision is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R seventh big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second win / fail decision is the fourth big win (the embodiment) 1) (corresponding to 15R 5th big hit of 1), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the second hit / fail judgment becomes 6th big hit (corresponding to 2R 6th big hit in the first embodiment), the fourth game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big hit (Example) 1 is equivalent to 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the first hit / fail judgment is fifth jackpot (corresponding to 4R third jackpot of Embodiment 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

  The “decreasing speed of the game medium used for the game” is given from the game medium (launched game ball) used in the unit time (for example, 1 minute) or the number of unit shots (for example, 100 shots) during the same period. The number obtained by subtracting game media (paid prize balls) is calculated as the number of game media (game balls) to be reduced. In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is performed for a predetermined period, the decrease rate of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) possessed by the player is in descending order of decrease rate. The first game> the second game (the fourth game)> the third game. In the third game, it can be said that the rate of decrease is negative because the longer the game is continued, the more the ball can be increased by small hits. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state where the game is played while decreasing the number of balls, while the third game is a state where the game is played while increasing the number of balls.

  Further, the type of the big hit (first big hit type) in the case where the result of the first success / failure determination is a big hit is different from the big hit type (second big hit type) in the case where the result of the second positive / failed determination is a big hit. It may be many. In addition, as a third game (highly accurate low base state) generated as a result of the second winning / failing determination, when a third game is obtained through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, a prize ball is obtained. It is assumed that the game becomes the third game after the big hit game that is easy. In addition, as the third game (highly accurate low base state) generated as a result of the first success / failure determination, there is no case of becoming a third game through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. It may be provided only when the third game is achieved through a big hit game that is easy to acquire.

  Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second winning / failing determination is set to be higher than the probability of being a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of occurrence of the small hit in the second winning / notifying determination can be increased. More preferably, the probability of occurrence of small hits in the second determination of success / failure is preferably ½ or more. In addition, the first entry / failure determination and the second entry / failure determination have the same probability of entry into the high probability state (operation probability of the probability variation function). On the other hand, the first entry / failure determination and the second entry / failure determination may have different rush probabilities for entering the state C (highly accurate low base state), and the state 2 (highly accurate low base state) is determined. The rush probability may be higher than the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game to be launched into the second game area where the third game in which the second win / fail determination is performed can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

  Also, in the second win / fail decision, if a big hit that does not enter the state C (highly accurate low base state) is reached, the big win is the number of winning balls that can be obtained from the big win (big hit game) in the second win / fail decision Is the biggest jackpot (big hit game). The jackpot is a jackpot (big hit game) with the smallest number of winning balls that can be obtained among the big hits (big hit games) in the first and second hit / fail judgments.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the game mode transition mode and enhances the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 2)
In conventional gaming machines, there is a game that makes a determination as to whether or not a game ball has entered a starting port and displays the symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the determination. In such a gaming machine, when the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and when the result of the determination of success / failure is out, there is a case where the symbol is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol. . In addition, there was a gaming machine having a plurality of special symbols and effect symbols as symbols (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

  In addition, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional gaming machine are both variably displayed and stopped based on the determination result. In addition, the special symbol indicates the result of the success / failure determination by displaying the change without displaying the game effect such as reach change after the change display, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the game effect such as reach change after the change display. This shows the result of the determination of success / failure. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, display control according to the purpose of each symbol has been made possible.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the coincidence of both symbols due to the display mode and display position of a plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and facilitates confirmation of a plurality of symbols by a display mode of a plurality of symbols, and provides a fair gaming machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Correct / incorrect determination execution means for executing correct / incorrect determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
A first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) for variably displaying the first identification information (special symbol) on the basis of the determination result,
A second identification information display section (effect design display section 7b) for variably displaying the second identification information (effect design) based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
A third identification information display unit (variation state indicator 49) for variably displaying the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information;
A game machine comprising special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the determination of success or failure is a specific result,
A first display unit (main display device 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit;
And a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information display unit that variably displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and the second identification information (effect symbol) are variably displayed. A second identification information display unit that displays, a third identification information display unit that variably displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol), and a game effect that is executed in accordance with the variation display of the second identification information. And a game effect display section. In addition, a first display configured to include a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display configured to include a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. And a section.

  Accordingly, it is possible to confirm the second identification information and the game effect indicating the result of the go / no-go determination by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the go / no-go determination by checking the first display unit. Thus, the first identification information and the third identification information displayed in a variable manner can be confirmed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1,
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a game ball can flow down and playing a game by flowing the game ball into the game area,
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit configured to include the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is disposed outside (outside) the gaming area, and the second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. Accordingly, the second display unit displays the second identification information indicating the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the success / failure determination in the game area, thereby confirming the flow of the game ball and the second display unit. The display mode can be confirmed. In addition, the first display unit that can confirm the first identification information and the third identification information is separated from the second display unit and arranged outside the game area, so that the first display unit is not confused by the game effect or the like. It is possible to reliably grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

  The first display unit is arranged outside the game area (the area outside the rail member that partitions the game area), and the second display unit is inside the game area (the area inside the rail member that partitions the game area). It is good also as what arranges to.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-2,
The first display unit is composed of an LED, the second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal,
The second display unit is larger than the first display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit is configured by an LED, the second display unit is configured by a liquid crystal, and the second display unit is a larger display unit than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be made simple and the display mode of the first identification information and the third identification information can be reliably grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by being composed of liquid crystal, it is possible to execute various and varied game effects, and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
A main control unit having the success / failure determination execution unit;
A sub-control unit that receives and controls a control signal from the main control unit, and
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is controlled by a main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are sub-control units. The display is controlled.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a main control unit and a sub-control unit that receives and controls the control signal from the main control unit. In the first display unit, the first identification information display unit is controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is controlled by the sub control unit. The second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is display-controlled by the sub-control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information that is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information that is controlled and displayed by the sub-control unit. Thus, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. This also makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

  The main control unit is a control unit that performs control related to special symbol display control, determination of success / failure, control related to sensor detection, control related to discharge of prize balls, and control related to opening and closing of a variable entrance, and a control unit that controls the game It is. The sub-control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and performs main control related to game effects such as operation control of the movable member and display control play of the effect display unit. This is a control unit that follows the control unit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
Game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information;
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
Game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers earlier than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when power supply is started, based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is provided with game information recovery means for recovering game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected. . When the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit included in the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit, thereby enabling display control. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal to diversify the game effects and performs a variety of display controls, so that a certain amount of time is required for the game information restoration work. On the other hand, since the 1st display part (3rd identification information display part) comprised simply by LED performs simple display control, it does not require long time for the recovery | restoration work of game information.

  Thereby, even if it is a display part controlled by the same sub control part, a 3rd identification information display part is restored prior to a 2nd display part, and display control can be performed immediately. As a result, the game can be started immediately after the power supply is started, in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but the second display unit composed of liquid crystal takes time to recover (the game is still restored after the game starts). Not)). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit that has spread quickly and can start display control.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of a plurality of symbols and to provide a fair gaming machine by the display mode of the plurality of symbols.

(Reference invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
An input means capable of input by a player;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
The first setting related to the effect can be changed according to the first input to the input means, and the second setting related to the effect can be changed according to the second input to the input means,
Perform a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return the production setting to the initial setting,
When an input to the input means for performing selection to return the production setting to the initial setting is made during the selection promotion production, the second setting is returned to the initial setting, while the first setting is initialized. It is characterized by not returning to (1).

  According to this configuration, when the input for performing the selection to return the production setting to the initial setting is performed during the selection promotion production, the second setting returns to the initial setting, while the first setting is the initial setting. Not returned to Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for a player who wants to return the second setting to the initial setting without returning the first setting to the initial setting.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1,
The production control means includes
During the selection promotion effect, even if the first input to the input means is performed, the first setting relating to the effect is not changed.

  According to this configuration, even when the first input is performed during the selection promotion effect, the first setting is not changed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the first setting is changed according to the first input during the selection promotion effect, and as a result, the selection promotion effect is hindered. is there.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-2.
The production control means includes
When an input to the input means for performing selection to return the effect setting to the initial setting is performed during the selection promotion effect, the selection promotion effect being executed is terminated, and after the selection promotion effect is completed, the input is performed. In accordance with the first input to the means, the first setting relating to the production can be changed.

  By the way, even after the end of the selection promotion effect, if the change of the first setting according to the first input to the input means is restricted, the period during which the change of the first setting is restricted becomes longer than necessary. However, convenience may be reduced. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, when the input for performing the selection to return the production setting to the initial setting is performed during the selection promotion production, the selection promotion production is finished, and after the selection promotion production is finished, Since the first setting is changed according to the first input to the input means, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the above problem.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3,
The production control means includes
When the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after the transition to the non-effect progress state where the effect based on the determination result of the determination means does not proceed, the selection promotion effect is started,
When the second time longer than the first time elapses without ending the non-game state after the transition to the non-effect progressing state, the first setting relating to the effect is returned to the initial setting. Is.

  According to this configuration, the first setting returns to the initial setting when the second time elapses without ending the non-production progress state after the transition to the non-production progress state. For this reason, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, for example, before one player stops the game and another player starts the game, the first setting is returned to the initial setting. It is possible to leave. In addition, since the selection promotion effect is started when the first time elapses without the non-effect progress state being ended after the transition to the non-effect progress state, for example, one player stops the game and another player When starting the game, the latter player can be notified that the second setting relating to the production has been changed from the initial setting, and whether or not the second setting is returned to the initial setting. Can be arbitrarily selected.

(Reference invention 4)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
An input means capable of input by a player;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
The first setting related to the effect can be changed according to the first input to the input means, and the second setting related to the effect can be changed according to the second input to the input means,
When the second setting has been changed from the initial setting, a selection promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to select whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting.
When the first input to the input means is performed when the selection promotion effect is not executed, the selection promotion is permitted while the change of the first setting according to the first input is permitted. The change of the first setting is restricted during the performance.

  According to this configuration, when the selection promotion effect is not performed, the first setting is changed according to the first input, while the first input is performed during the selection promotion effect. The first setting is not changed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the first setting is changed according to the first input during the selection promotion effect, and as a result, the selection promotion effect is hindered. is there.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1,
The production control means includes
After the input to the input means for selecting to return the second setting to the initial setting is performed during the execution of the selection promotion effect, the first corresponding to the first input to the input means It is characterized by permitting the change of the setting.

  According to this configuration, after the input for selecting the second setting to be returned to the initial setting is performed during the selection promotion effect, the change of the first setting according to the first input is permitted. . For this reason, while suppressing that the change of the 1st setting according to the 1st input obstructs the selection promotion production, the period when the change of the 1st setting is restricted becomes longer than necessary, and it is convenient. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such as deterioration in performance.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1 or 4-2.
The production control means includes
When the first time elapses without ending the non-effect progress state after the transition to the non-effect progress state where the effect based on the determination result of the determination means does not proceed, the selection promotion effect is started,
The first setting is returned to the initial setting when a second time longer than the first time elapses after the transition to the non-production progress state without ending the non-production progress state. It is.

  According to this configuration, the first setting returns to the initial setting when the second time elapses without ending the non-production progress state after the transition to the non-production progress state. For this reason, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, for example, before one player stops the game and another player starts the game, the first setting is returned to the initial setting. It is possible to leave. In addition, since the selection promotion effect is started when the first time elapses without the non-effect progress state being ended after the transition to the non-effect progress state, for example, one player stops the game and another player When starting the game, the latter player can be notified that the second setting relating to the production has been changed from the initial setting, and whether or not the second setting is returned to the initial setting. Can be arbitrarily selected.

(Reference invention 5)
In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 5-1,
An input means capable of input by a player;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
Depending on the input to the input means, it is possible to change a plurality of settings related to the production,
When settings different from the initial settings are made for the plurality of settings, the contents of the plurality of settings can be sequentially displayed in a predetermined first display area.

  According to this configuration, when a setting different from the initial setting is made with respect to a plurality of settings related to the effect, the contents of the plurality of settings are displayed in order in the first display area. Therefore, the display area for displaying the contents of the plurality of settings can be reduced as compared with the case where the contents of the plurality of settings are displayed side by side, It is possible to secure a wide display area for displaying an image or the like.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1,
The production control means includes
The second display area adjacent to the first display area can display the number of the plurality of settings set differently from the initial settings.

  According to this configuration, since the number of a plurality of settings that are different from the initial settings are displayed in the second display area (close to the first display area), the contents of the plurality of settings are not displayed simultaneously. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that it is difficult for the player to recognize how many settings are different from the initial settings.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner along with the special symbol variation display, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the determination along with the special symbol stop display,
During the special symbol variation display, as the effect symbol, an effect symbol configured to include identification information that can distinguish the effect symbol from other effect symbols and a decoration image added to the identification information. A first display control to display;
During the variation display of the special symbol, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and has the same display content as the decoration image is displayed in a predetermined display area of the image display means, and the similar image is used. It is possible to execute the second display control for performing the effect.

  According to this configuration, during the variation display of the special symbol, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and has the same display content as the decoration image is displayed in the predetermined display area, and an effect using the similar image is displayed. May be performed. In this way, since the display contents of the similar image used for the production and the decoration image constituting the production design are common, the production using the production image is performed as if the production using the similar image was performed. It is possible to make the player feel, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the production by the synergistic effect of the production using the similar image and the production displaying the production design.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1,
The production control means includes
As the first display control, the effect design is variably displayed in a first variation mode,
As the second display control, after the similar image is variably displayed in a second variation mode common to the first variation mode, an effect is performed using the similar image displayed in the predetermined display area. It is characterized by this.

  According to this configuration, since the similar image is variably displayed in a variation manner that is common to the effect symbol, the player is made to feel the effect using the similar image as if the effect using the effect symbol is being performed. The effect can be improved, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1 or reference invention 6-2.
The production control means includes
After the similar image used for the effect in the second display control is erased from the predetermined display area, an effect pattern configured to include a decorative image having a display content different from that of the similar image The third display control to be displayed in the display area can be further executed.

  According to this configuration, after the similar image is erased from the predetermined display area, the effect design configured to include the decorative image having a display content different from that of the similar image is displayed in the predetermined display area. For this reason, after a certain effect design is displayed on the predetermined display area, it is effective that the player misidentifies that the same effect design as the display design is displayed again on the predetermined display area. It is possible to suppress.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3,
The production control means includes
When the second display control is executed, after the similar image displayed by the second display control is erased from the image display means, an effect design visible by the player is displayed on the image display means It is characterized by.

  According to this configuration, after the similar image is erased from the image display unit, the effect design is displayed on the image display unit in a visible manner. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the player misidentifies that the same effect symbol is displayed at the same time even though the same effect symbol is not displayed at the same time. It is.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4,
The production control means includes
An effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the first effect mode and the second effect mode,
While the production in the second production mode is being executed, the second display control can be executed, while during the production in the first production mode, the second display control is not executed. It is characterized by.

  According to this configuration, since the second display control that is not performed during the execution of the effect in the first effect mode is executed during the execution of the effect in the second effect mode, it is compared with the first effect mode. It is possible to execute a more interesting performance.

(Reference invention 7)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, an effect symbol constituted by including the first partial image and the second partial image is variably displayed along with the variation display of the special symbol, and the determination is performed along with the stop display of the special symbol. First display control to stop and display the effect design in a manner showing the result of
The first partial image and the second partial image can be individually displayed, and the second display control can be executed in which these partial images are combined and displayed as the effect symbol.

  According to this configuration, the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed in addition to the case where the effect design configured to include the first partial image and the second partial image is variably displayed and then stopped. In some cases, these partial images are combined and displayed as an effect design. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which effect symbols are displayed based on the displayed partial image, and the first partial image and the second partial image remain synthesized. Compared to the above, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect of displaying the effect symbol.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1,
The production control means includes
The display of the second partial image is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the first partial image is started, and the second display control is performed in which these partial images are combined and displayed as the effect symbol. It is characterized by being possible.

  According to this configuration, the first partial image is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first partial image, the display of the second partial image is started in addition to the first partial image. The images are combined and displayed as an effect design. In this way, since the partial images constituting the effect symbol are displayed in order and the appearance of the effect symbol is displayed, from the state where the effect symbol has the first partial image and the second partial image. Compared to a conventional gaming machine that does not change, it is possible to obtain an extremely high production effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1 or reference invention 7-2.
The second partial image is identification information for identifying the effect symbol from other effect symbols,
The first partial image is a decoration image that decorates the second partial image.

  According to this configuration, the identification information as the second partial image and the decoration image as the first partial image are individually displayed, and these partial images are combined and displayed as an effect design. In this way, since the identification information and the decoration image that are separately displayed as the two partial images are combined to produce the effect symbol, the effect symbol is simply variably displayed and then compared with the conventional gaming machine that stops display. Thus, it is possible to obtain an extremely high production effect.

  Two or more arbitrary inventions of Reference Invention 1 to Reference Invention 7 described above may be combined.

  1 Pachinko machine, 7a first display screen, 7b effect symbol display area, 9c hold icon display area, 9e concerned icon display area, 71a second display screen, 72a third display screen, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display) Part), 8 stage design, 20 1st start opening, 21 2nd start opening, 26 3rd start opening, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special Symbol display part), 41b Second special symbol display (second special symbol display part), 63a First effect button, 63b Second effect button, 63c First effect button detection switch, 63d Second effect button detection switch, 63e Key operation detection switch, 67 speaker, 80 main control board (main control part), 81 game control microcomputer, 90 sub control board (sub control part), 91 for effect control Icons, 100 image control board (image control unit), 101 an image control microcomputer, 103a third effect reservation display, 103b fourth effect reservation display, 106 audio control board, 107 a lamp control board.

Claims (3)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, an effect symbol constituted by including the first partial image and the second partial image is variably displayed along with the variation display of the special symbol, and the determination is performed along with the stop display of the special symbol. First display control to stop and display the effect design in a manner showing the result of
A gaming machine, wherein the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed, and the second display control for combining the partial images and displaying them as the effect symbols can be executed. The production control means includes
The display of the second partial image is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the first partial image is started, and the second display control is performed in which these partial images are combined and displayed as the effect symbol. The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is possible. The second partial image is identification information for identifying the effect symbol from other effect symbols,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first partial image is a decoration image that decorates the second partial image.

Images